[gtkmm] Use the generated signal docs for wrapped signals. Bug #668918.
- From: Josà Alburquerque <jaalburqu src gnome org>
- To: commits-list gnome org
- Cc:
- Subject: [gtkmm] Use the generated signal docs for wrapped signals. Bug #668918.
- Date: Tue, 7 Feb 2012 23:34:04 +0000 (UTC)
commit d634d9459d4e3d32223e95c4aad8bb49de2b2050
Author: Josà Alburquerque <jaalburqu svn gnome org>
Date: Tue Feb 7 18:29:32 2012 -0500
Use the generated signal docs for wrapped signals. Bug #668918.
* gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml:
* gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerate passing the -i (--with-signals)
option to docextract_to_xml.py so that signal documentation is
included in these files.
* gdk/src/screen.hg:
* gtk/src/action.hg:
* gtk/src/actiongroup.hg:
* gtk/src/cellrenderer.hg:
* gtk/src/cellrenderertoggle.hg:
* gtk/src/checkmenuitem.hg:
* gtk/src/colorbutton.hg:
* gtk/src/combobox.hg:
* gtk/src/entrycompletion.hg:
* gtk/src/filechooser.hg:
* gtk/src/fontbutton.hg:
* gtk/src/radioaction.hg:
* gtk/src/range.hg:
* gtk/src/recentchooser.hg:
* gtk/src/recentmanager.hg:
* gtk/src/scale.hg:
* gtk/src/spinbutton.hg:
* gtk/src/textbuffer.hg:
* gtk/src/togglebutton.hg:
* gtk/src/toolbar.hg:
* gtk/src/toolbutton.hg:
* gtk/src/toolitem.hg:
* gtk/src/uimanager.hg:
* gtk/src/widget.hg:
* gdk/src/display.hg:
* gdk/src/displaymanager.hg: Remove existing signal docs in these
files because they will already be included in the generation process
by gmmproc.
ChangeLog | 38 +
gdk/src/display.hg | 6 -
gdk/src/displaymanager.hg | 8 -
gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml | 3548 +++------------
gdk/src/screen.hg | 3 -
gtk/src/action.hg | 2 -
gtk/src/actiongroup.hg | 45 -
gtk/src/cellrenderer.hg | 26 +-
gtk/src/cellrenderertoggle.hg | 5 +-
gtk/src/checkmenuitem.hg | 4 -
gtk/src/colorbutton.hg | 4 -
gtk/src/combobox.hg | 5 -
gtk/src/entrycompletion.hg | 18 -
gtk/src/filechooser.hg | 56 -
gtk/src/fontbutton.hg | 5 +-
gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml |10163 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-
gtk/src/radioaction.hg | 6 -
gtk/src/range.hg | 22 -
gtk/src/recentchooser.hg | 11 -
gtk/src/recentmanager.hg | 2 -
gtk/src/scale.hg | 6 -
gtk/src/spinbutton.hg | 16 -
gtk/src/textbuffer.hg | 12 -
gtk/src/togglebutton.hg | 2 -
gtk/src/toolbar.hg | 24 -
gtk/src/toolbutton.hg | 4 -
gtk/src/toolitem.hg | 37 -
gtk/src/uimanager.hg | 46 -
gtk/src/widget.hg | 111 -
29 files changed, 10795 insertions(+), 3440 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog
index 626e91d..635c70b 100644
--- a/ChangeLog
+++ b/ChangeLog
@@ -1,3 +1,41 @@
+2012-02-07 Josà Alburquerque <jaalburquerque gmail com>
+
+ Use the generated signal docs for wrapped signals. Bug #668918.
+
+ * gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml:
+ * gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerate passing the -i (--with-signals)
+ option to docextract_to_xml.py so that signal documentation is
+ included in these files.
+
+ * gdk/src/screen.hg:
+ * gtk/src/action.hg:
+ * gtk/src/actiongroup.hg:
+ * gtk/src/cellrenderer.hg:
+ * gtk/src/cellrenderertoggle.hg:
+ * gtk/src/checkmenuitem.hg:
+ * gtk/src/colorbutton.hg:
+ * gtk/src/combobox.hg:
+ * gtk/src/entrycompletion.hg:
+ * gtk/src/filechooser.hg:
+ * gtk/src/fontbutton.hg:
+ * gtk/src/radioaction.hg:
+ * gtk/src/range.hg:
+ * gtk/src/recentchooser.hg:
+ * gtk/src/recentmanager.hg:
+ * gtk/src/scale.hg:
+ * gtk/src/spinbutton.hg:
+ * gtk/src/textbuffer.hg:
+ * gtk/src/togglebutton.hg:
+ * gtk/src/toolbar.hg:
+ * gtk/src/toolbutton.hg:
+ * gtk/src/toolitem.hg:
+ * gtk/src/uimanager.hg:
+ * gtk/src/widget.hg:
+ * gdk/src/display.hg:
+ * gdk/src/displaymanager.hg: Remove existing signal docs in these
+ files because they will already be included in the generation process
+ by gmmproc.
+
3.3.14:
2012-01-10 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
diff --git a/gdk/src/display.hg b/gdk/src/display.hg
index ca1282b..fa2812b 100644
--- a/gdk/src/display.hg
+++ b/gdk/src/display.hg
@@ -160,13 +160,7 @@ public:
//We use no_default_handler because GdkDisplayClass is private.
- /** The closed signal is emitted when the connection to the windowing
- * system for this display is closed.
- *
- * @param is_error true if the display was closed due to an error
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void closed(bool is_error), closed, no_default_handler)
-
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void opened(), opened, no_default_handler)
};
diff --git a/gdk/src/displaymanager.hg b/gdk/src/displaymanager.hg
index 9689315..864cf9f 100644
--- a/gdk/src/displaymanager.hg
+++ b/gdk/src/displaymanager.hg
@@ -57,16 +57,8 @@ public:
#m4 _CONVERSION(`GdkDisplay*',`const Glib::RefPtr<Display>&', Glib::wrap($3, true))
-
//We use no_default_handler because GdkDisplayManagerClass is private.
-
- /** The display_opened signal is emitted when a display is opened.
- *
- * @newin{2,2}
- *
- * @param display the opened display
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void display_opened(const Glib::RefPtr<Display>& display), display-opened, no_default_handler)
};
diff --git a/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml b/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
index a6941a6..30bb86f 100644
--- a/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
+++ b/gdk/src/gdk_docs.xml
@@ -1,4 +1,390 @@
<root>
+<signal name="GdkDevice::changed">
+<description>
+The ::changed signal is emitted either when the #GdkDevice
+has changed the number of either axes or keys. For example
+In X this will normally happen when the slave device routing
+events through the master device changes (for example, user
+switches from the USB mouse to a tablet), in that case the
+master device will change to reflect the new slave device
+axes and keys.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDevice that changed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkDeviceManager::device-added">
+<description>
+The ::device-added signal is emitted either when a new master
+pointer is created, or when a slave (Hardware) input device
+is plugged in.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="device_manager">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> the newly added #GdkDevice.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkDeviceManager::device-changed">
+<description>
+The ::device-changed signal is emitted whenever a device
+has changed in the hierarchy, either slave devices being
+disconnected from their master device or connected to
+another one, or master devices being added or removed
+a slave device.
+
+If a slave device is detached from all master devices
+(gdk_device_get_associated_device() returns %NULL), its
+#GdkDeviceType will change to %GDK_DEVICE_TYPE_FLOATING,
+if it's attached, it will change to %GDK_DEVICE_TYPE_SLAVE.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="device_manager">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDevice that changed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkDeviceManager::device-removed">
+<description>
+The ::device-removed signal is emitted either when a master
+pointer is removed, or when a slave (Hardware) input device
+is unplugged.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="device_manager">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> the just removed #GdkDevice.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkDisplay::closed">
+<description>
+The ::closed signal is emitted when the connection to the windowing
+system for @display is closed.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_error">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the display was closed due to an error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkDisplay::opened">
+<description>
+The ::opened signal is emitted when the connection to the windowing
+system for @display is opened.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkDisplayManager::display-opened">
+<description>
+The ::display-opened signal is emitted when a display is opened.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the opened display
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkKeymap::direction-changed">
+<description>
+The ::direction-changed signal gets emitted when the direction of
+the keymap changes.
+
+Since: 2.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="keymap">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkKeymap::keys-changed">
+<description>
+The ::keys-changed signal is emitted when the mapping represented by
+ keymap changes.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="keymap">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkKeymap::state-changed">
+<description>
+The ::state-changed signal is emitted when the state of the
+keyboard changes, e.g when Caps Lock is turned on or off.
+See gdk_keymap_get_caps_lock_state().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="keymap">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkScreen::composited-changed">
+<description>
+The ::composited-changed signal is emitted when the composited
+status of the screen changes
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkScreen::monitors-changed">
+<description>
+The ::monitors-changed signal is emitted when the number, size
+or position of the monitors attached to the screen change.
+
+Only for X11 and OS X for now. A future implementation for Win32
+may be a possibility.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkScreen::size-changed">
+<description>
+The ::size-changed signal is emitted when the pixel width or
+height of a screen changes.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkWindow::create-surface">
+<description>
+The ::create-surface signal is emitted when an offscreen window
+needs its surface (re)created, which happens either when the the
+window is first drawn to, or when the window is being
+resized. The first signal handler that returns a non-%NULL
+surface will stop any further signal emission, and its surface
+will be used.
+
+Note that it is not possible to access the window's previous
+surface from within any callback of this signal. Calling
+gdk_offscreen_window_get_surface() will lead to a crash.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the offscreen window on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the offscreen surface to create
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the offscreen surface to create
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the newly created #cairo_surface_t for the offscreen window
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkWindow::from-embedder">
+<description>
+The ::from-embedder signal is emitted to translate coordinates
+in the embedder of an offscreen window to the offscreen window.
+
+See also #GtkWindow::to-embedder.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the offscreen window on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embedder-x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate in the embedder window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embedder-y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate in the embedder window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offscreen-x">
+<parameter_description> return location for the x
+coordinate in the offscreen window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offscreen-y">
+<parameter_description> return location for the y
+coordinate in the offscreen window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkWindow::pick-embedded-child">
+<description>
+The ::pick-embedded-child signal is emitted to find an embedded
+child at the given position.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the window on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate in the window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate in the window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GdkWindow of the embedded child at
+ x, @y, or %NULL
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GdkWindow::to-embedder">
+<description>
+The ::to-embedder signal is emitted to translate coordinates
+in an offscreen window to its embedder.
+
+See also #GtkWindow::from-embedder.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the offscreen window on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offscreen-x">
+<parameter_description> x coordinate in the offscreen window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offscreen-y">
+<parameter_description> y coordinate in the offscreen window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embedder-x">
+<parameter_description> return location for the x
+coordinate in the embedder window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="embedder-y">
+<parameter_description> return location for the y
+coordinate in the embedder window
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
<function name="gdk_add_option_entries_libgtk_only">
<description>
Appends gdk option entries to the passed in option group. This is
@@ -376,6 +762,8 @@ Sets the specified #GdkColor as the source color of @cr.
Since: 2.8
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gdk_cairo_set_source_rgba() instead
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="cr">
@@ -3730,24 +4118,50 @@ Since: 3.0
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_events_get_angle">
+<function name="gdk_event_triggers_context_menu">
<description>
-If both events contain X/Y information, this function will return %TRUE
-and return in @angle the relative angle from @event1 to @event2. The rotation
-direction for positive angles is from the positive X axis towards the positive
-Y axis.
+This function returns whether a #GdkEventButton should trigger a
+context menu, according to platform conventions. The right mouse
+button always triggers context menus. Additionally, if
+gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask() returns a non-0 mask for
+%GDK_MODIFIER_INTENT_CONTEXT_MENU, then the left mouse button will
+also trigger a context menu if this modifier is pressed.
-Since: 3.0
+This function should always be used instead of simply checking for
+event->button == %GDK_BUTTON_SECONDARY.
+
+Since: 3.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="event1">
-<parameter_description> first #GdkEvent
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent, currently only button events are meaningful values
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event2">
-<parameter_description> second #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the event should trigger a context menu.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_events_get_angle">
+<description>
+If both events contain X/Y information, this function will return %TRUE
+and return in @angle the relative angle from @event1 to @event2. The rotation
+direction for positive angles is from the positive X axis towards the positive
+Y axis.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="event1">
+<parameter_description> first #GdkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event2">
+<parameter_description> second #GdkEvent
+</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="angle">
<parameter_description> return location for the relative angle between both events
@@ -4181,6 +4595,36 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask">
+<description>
+Returns the modifier mask the @keymap's windowing system backend
+uses for a particular purpose.
+
+Note that this function always returns real hardware modifiers, not
+virtual ones (e.g. it will return #GDK_MOD1_MASK rather than
+#GDK_META_MASK if the backend maps MOD1 to META), so there are use
+cases where the return value of this function has to be transformed
+by gdk_keymap_add_virtual_modifiers() in order to contain the
+expected result.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="keymap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkKeymap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="intent">
+<parameter_description> the use case for the modifier mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the modifier mask used for @intent.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_keymap_get_num_lock_state">
<description>
Returns whether the Num Lock modifer is locked.
@@ -4792,2848 +5236,120 @@ Parse command line arguments, and store for future
use by calls to gdk_display_open().
Any arguments used by GDK are removed from the array and @argc and @argv are
-updated accordingly.
-
-You shouldn't call this function explicitely if you are using
-gtk_init(), gtk_init_check(), gdk_init(), or gdk_init_check().
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> the number of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> the array of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_add_alpha">
-<description>
-Takes an existing pixbuf and adds an alpha channel to it.
-If the existing pixbuf already had an alpha channel, the channel
-values are copied from the original; otherwise, the alpha channel
-is initialized to 255 (full opacity).
-
-If @substitute_color is %TRUE, then the color specified by (@r, @g, @b) will be
-assigned zero opacity. That is, if you pass (255, 255, 255) for the
-substitute color, all white pixels will become fully transparent.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="substitute_color">
-<parameter_description> Whether to set a color to zero opacity. If this
-is %FALSE, then the (@r, @g, @b) arguments will be ignored.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="r">
-<parameter_description> Red value to substitute.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="g">
-<parameter_description> Green value to substitute.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="b">
-<parameter_description> Blue value to substitute.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_height">
-<description>
-Queries the height of the bounding box of a pixbuf animation.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> An animation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Height of the bounding box of the animation.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_iter">
-<description>
-Get an iterator for displaying an animation. The iterator provides
-the frames that should be displayed at a given time.
-It should be freed after use with g_object_unref().
-
- start_time would normally come from g_get_current_time(), and
-marks the beginning of animation playback. After creating an
-iterator, you should immediately display the pixbuf returned by
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf(). Then, you should install a
-timeout (with g_timeout_add()) or by some other mechanism ensure
-that you'll update the image after
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_delay_time() milliseconds. Each time
-the image is updated, you should reinstall the timeout with the new,
-possibly-changed delay time.
-
-As a shortcut, if @start_time is %NULL, the result of
-g_get_current_time() will be used automatically.
-
-To update the image (i.e. possibly change the result of
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf() to a new frame of the animation),
-call gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_advance().
-
-If you're using #GdkPixbufLoader, in addition to updating the image
-after the delay time, you should also update it whenever you
-receive the area_updated signal and
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_on_currently_loading_frame() returns
-%TRUE. In this case, the frame currently being fed into the loader
-has received new data, so needs to be refreshed. The delay time for
-a frame may also be modified after an area_updated signal, for
-example if the delay time for a frame is encoded in the data after
-the frame itself. So your timeout should be reinstalled after any
-area_updated signal.
-
-A delay time of -1 is possible, indicating "infinite."
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_time">
-<parameter_description> time when the animation starts playing
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an iterator to move over the animation
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_static_image">
-<description>
-If an animation is really just a plain image (has only one frame),
-this function returns that image. If the animation is an animation,
-this function returns a reasonable thing to display as a static
-unanimated image, which might be the first frame, or something more
-sophisticated. If an animation hasn't loaded any frames yet, this
-function will return %NULL.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> unanimated image representing the animation
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_width">
-<description>
-Queries the width of the bounding box of a pixbuf animation.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> An animation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Width of the bounding box of the animation.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_is_static_image">
-<description>
-If you load a file with gdk_pixbuf_animation_new_from_file() and it turns
-out to be a plain, unanimated image, then this function will return
-%TRUE. Use gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_static_image() to retrieve
-the image.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the "animation" was really just an image
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_advance">
-<description>
-Possibly advances an animation to a new frame. Chooses the frame based
-on the start time passed to gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_iter().
-
- current_time would normally come from g_get_current_time(), and
-must be greater than or equal to the time passed to
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_iter(), and must increase or remain
-unchanged each time gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf() is
-called. That is, you can't go backward in time; animations only
-play forward.
-
-As a shortcut, pass %NULL for the current time and g_get_current_time()
-will be invoked on your behalf. So you only need to explicitly pass
- current_time if you're doing something odd like playing the animation
-at double speed.
-
-If this function returns %FALSE, there's no need to update the animation
-display, assuming the display had been rendered prior to advancing;
-if %TRUE, you need to call gdk_animation_iter_get_pixbuf() and update the
-display with the new pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimationIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="current_time">
-<parameter_description> current time
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the image may need updating
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_delay_time">
-<description>
-Gets the number of milliseconds the current pixbuf should be displayed,
-or -1 if the current pixbuf should be displayed forever. g_timeout_add()
-conveniently takes a timeout in milliseconds, so you can use a timeout
-to schedule the next update.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an animation iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> delay time in milliseconds (thousandths of a second)
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Gets the current pixbuf which should be displayed; the pixbuf will
-be the same size as the animation itself
-(gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_width(), gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_height()).
-This pixbuf should be displayed for
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_get_delay_time() milliseconds. The caller
-of this function does not own a reference to the returned pixbuf;
-the returned pixbuf will become invalid when the iterator advances
-to the next frame, which may happen anytime you call
-gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_advance(). Copy the pixbuf to keep it
-(don't just add a reference), as it may get recycled as you advance
-the iterator.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an animation iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the pixbuf to be displayed
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_iter_on_currently_loading_frame">
-<description>
-Used to determine how to respond to the area_updated signal on
-#GdkPixbufLoader when loading an animation. area_updated is emitted
-for an area of the frame currently streaming in to the loader. So if
-you're on the currently loading frame, you need to redraw the screen for
-the updated area.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufAnimationIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the frame we're on is partially loaded, or the last frame
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_new_from_file">
-<description>
-Creates a new animation by loading it from a file. The file format is
-detected automatically. If the file's format does not support multi-frame
-images, then an animation with a single frame will be created. Possible errors
-are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created animation with a reference count of 1, or %NULL
-if any of several error conditions ocurred: the file could not be opened,
-there was no loader for the file's format, there was not enough memory to
-allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained invalid data.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_ref">
-<description>
-Adds a reference to an animation.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> An animation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The same as the @animation argument.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_animation_unref">
-<description>
-Removes a reference from an animation.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> An animation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_apply_embedded_orientation">
-<description>
-Takes an existing pixbuf and checks for the presence of an
-associated "orientation" option, which may be provided by the
-jpeg loader (which reads the exif orientation tag) or the
-tiff loader (which reads the tiff orientation tag, and
-compensates it for the partial transforms performed by
-libtiff). If an orientation option/tag is present, the
-appropriate transform will be performed so that the pixbuf
-is oriented correctly.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or a reference to the
-input pixbuf (with an increased reference count).
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite">
-<description>
-Creates a transformation of the source image @src by scaling by
- scale_x and @scale_y then translating by @offset_x and @offset_y.
-This gives an image in the coordinates of the destination pixbuf.
-The rectangle (@dest_x, @dest_y, @dest_width, @dest_height)
-is then composited onto the corresponding rectangle of the
-original destination image.
-
-When the destination rectangle contains parts not in the source
-image, the data at the edges of the source image is replicated
-to infinity.
-
-<figure id="pixbuf-composite-diagram">
-<title>Compositing of pixbufs</title>
-<graphic fileref="composite.png" format="PNG"/>
-</figure>
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf into which to render the results
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> the left coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> the top coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_x">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the X direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_y">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the Y direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_x">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the X direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_y">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the Y direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overall_alpha">
-<parameter_description> overall alpha for source image (0..255)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite_color">
-<description>
-Creates a transformation of the source image @src by scaling by
- scale_x and @scale_y then translating by @offset_x and @offset_y,
-then composites the rectangle (@dest_x ,@dest_y, @dest_width,
- dest_height) of the resulting image with a checkboard of the
-colors @color1 and @color2 and renders it onto the destination
-image.
-
-See gdk_pixbuf_composite_color_simple() for a simpler variant of this
-function suitable for many tasks.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf into which to render the results
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> the left coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> the top coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_x">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the X direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_y">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the Y direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_x">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the X direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_y">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the Y direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overall_alpha">
-<parameter_description> overall alpha for source image (0..255)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="check_x">
-<parameter_description> the X offset for the checkboard (origin of checkboard is at - check_x, - check_y)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="check_y">
-<parameter_description> the Y offset for the checkboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="check_size">
-<parameter_description> the size of checks in the checkboard (must be a power of two)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color1">
-<parameter_description> the color of check at upper left
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color2">
-<parameter_description> the color of the other check
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_composite_color_simple">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GdkPixbuf by scaling @src to @dest_width x
- dest_height and compositing the result with a checkboard of colors
- color1 and @color2.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of destination image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of destination image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="overall_alpha">
-<parameter_description> overall alpha for source image (0..255)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="check_size">
-<parameter_description> the size of checks in the checkboard (must be a power of two)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color1">
-<parameter_description> the color of check at upper left
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color2">
-<parameter_description> the color of the other check
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
-allocated for it.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_copy">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GdkPixbuf with a copy of the information in the specified
- pixbuf
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or %NULL if
-not enough memory could be allocated.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_copy_area">
-<description>
-Copies a rectangular area from @src_pixbuf to @dest_pixbuf. Conversion of
-pixbuf formats is done automatically.
-
-If the source rectangle overlaps the destination rectangle on the
-same pixbuf, it will be overwritten during the copy operation.
-Therefore, you can not use this function to scroll a pixbuf.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src_pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> Source pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_x">
-<parameter_description> Source X coordinate within @src_pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_y">
-<parameter_description> Source Y coordinate within @src_pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Width of the area to copy.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Height of the area to copy.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> Destination pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate within @dest_pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate within @dest_pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_fill">
-<description>
-Clears a pixbuf to the given RGBA value, converting the RGBA value into
-the pixbuf's pixel format. The alpha will be ignored if the pixbuf
-doesn't have an alpha channel.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixel">
-<parameter_description> RGBA pixel to clear to
-(0xffffffff is opaque white, 0x00000000 transparent black)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_flip">
-<description>
-Flips a pixbuf horizontally or vertically and returns the
-result in a new pixbuf.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="horizontal">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to flip horizontally, %FALSE to flip vertically
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
-allocated for it.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_copy">
-<description>
-Creates a copy of @format
-
-Since: 2.22
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly allocated copy of a #GdkPixbufFormat. Use
-gdk_pixbuf_format_free() to free the resources when done
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_free">
-<description>
-Frees the resources allocated when copying a #GdkPixbufFormat
-using gdk_pixbuf_format_copy()
-
-Since: 2.22
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_description">
-<description>
-Returns a description of the format.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a description of the format.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_extensions">
-<description>
-Returns the filename extensions typically used for files in the
-given format.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a %NULL-terminated array of filename extensions which must be
-freed with g_strfreev() when it is no longer needed.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_license">
-<description>
-Returns information about the license of the image loader for the format. The
-returned string should be a shorthand for a wellknown license, e.g. "LGPL",
-"GPL", "QPL", "GPL/QPL", or "other" to indicate some other license. This
-string should be freed with g_free() when it's no longer needed.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a string describing the license of @format.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_mime_types">
-<description>
-Returns the mime types supported by the format.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a %NULL-terminated array of mime types which must be freed with
-g_strfreev() when it is no longer needed.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_get_name">
-<description>
-Returns the name of the format.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the name of the format.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_disabled">
-<description>
-Returns whether this image format is disabled. See
-gdk_pixbuf_format_set_disabled().
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether this image format is disabled.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_scalable">
-<description>
-Returns whether this image format is scalable. If a file is in a
-scalable format, it is preferable to load it at the desired size,
-rather than loading it at the default size and scaling the
-resulting pixbuf to the desired size.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether this image format is scalable.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_is_writable">
-<description>
-Returns whether pixbufs can be saved in the given format.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether pixbufs can be saved in the given format.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_format_set_disabled">
-<description>
-Disables or enables an image format. If a format is disabled,
-gdk-pixbuf won't use the image loader for this format to load
-images. Applications can use this to avoid using image loaders
-with an inappropriate license, see gdk_pixbuf_format_get_license().
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufFormat
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="disabled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to disable the format @format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_from_pixdata">
-<description>
-Converts a #GdkPixdata to a #GdkPixbuf. If @copy_pixels is %TRUE or
-if the pixel data is run-length-encoded, the pixel data is copied into
-newly-allocated memory; otherwise it is reused.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata to convert into a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="copy_pixels">
-<parameter_description> whether to copy raw pixel data; run-length encoded
-pixel data is always copied.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store possible errors.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GdkPixbuf.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_bits_per_sample">
-<description>
-Queries the number of bits per color sample in a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Number of bits per color sample.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_colorspace">
-<description>
-Queries the color space of a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Color space.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_file_info">
-<description>
-Parses an image file far enough to determine its format and size.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> The name of the file to identify.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the width of the image, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the height of the image, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbufFormat describing the image format of the file
-or %NULL if the image format wasn't recognized. The return value
-is owned by GdkPixbuf and should not be freed.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_formats">
-<description>
-Obtains the available information about the image formats supported
-by GdkPixbuf.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> A list of
-#GdkPixbufFormat<!-- -->s describing the supported
-image formats. The list should be freed when it is no longer needed,
-but the structures themselves are owned by #GdkPixbuf and should not be
-freed.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_from_surface">
-<description>
-Transfers image data from a #cairo_surface_t and converts it to an RGB(A)
-representation inside a #GdkPixbuf. This allows you to efficiently read
-individual pixels from cairo surfaces. For #GdkWindows, use
-gdk_pixbuf_get_from_window() instead.
-
-This function will create an RGB pixbuf with 8 bits per channel.
-The pixbuf will contain an alpha channel if the @surface contains one.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="surface">
-<parameter_description> surface to copy from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_x">
-<parameter_description> Source X coordinate within @surface
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_y">
-<parameter_description> Source Y coordinate within @surface
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Width in pixels of region to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Height in pixels of region to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference
-count of 1, or %NULL on error
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_from_window">
-<description>
-Transfers image data from a #GdkWindow and converts it to an RGB(A)
-representation inside a #GdkPixbuf. In other words, copies
-image data from a server-side drawable to a client-side RGB(A) buffer.
-This allows you to efficiently read individual pixels on the client side.
-
-This function will create an RGB pixbuf with 8 bits per channel with
-the same size specified by the @width and @height arguments. The pixbuf
-will contain an alpha channel if the @window contains one.
-
-If the window is off the screen, then there is no image data in the
-obscured/offscreen regions to be placed in the pixbuf. The contents of
-portions of the pixbuf corresponding to the offscreen region are undefined.
-
-If the window you're obtaining data from is partially obscured by
-other windows, then the contents of the pixbuf areas corresponding
-to the obscured regions are undefined.
-
-If the window is not mapped (typically because it's iconified/minimized
-or not on the current workspace), then %NULL will be returned.
-
-If memory can't be allocated for the return value, %NULL will be returned
-instead.
-
-(In short, there are several ways this function can fail, and if it fails
-it returns %NULL; so check the return value.)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> Source window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_x">
-<parameter_description> Source X coordinate within @window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_y">
-<parameter_description> Source Y coordinate within @window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Width in pixels of region to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Height in pixels of region to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference
-count of 1, or %NULL on error
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_has_alpha">
-<description>
-Queries whether a pixbuf has an alpha channel (opacity information).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if it has an alpha channel, %FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_height">
-<description>
-Queries the height of a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Height in pixels.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_n_channels">
-<description>
-Queries the number of channels of a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Number of channels.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_option">
-<description>
-Looks up @key in the list of options that may have been attached to the
- pixbuf when it was loaded, or that may have been attached by another
-function using gdk_pixbuf_set_option().
-
-For instance, the ANI loader provides "Title" and "Artist" options.
-The ICO, XBM, and XPM loaders provide "x_hot" and "y_hot" hot-spot
-options for cursor definitions. The PNG loader provides the tEXt ancillary
-chunk key/value pairs as options. Since 2.12, the TIFF and JPEG loaders
-return an "orientation" option string that corresponds to the embedded
-TIFF/Exif orientation tag (if present).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the value associated with @key. This is a nul-terminated
-string that should not be freed or %NULL if @key was not found.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_pixels">
-<description>
-Queries a pointer to the pixel data of a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A pointer to the pixbuf's pixel data. Please see <xref linkend="image-data"/>
-for information about how the pixel data is stored in
-memory.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_rowstride">
-<description>
-Queries the rowstride of a pixbuf, which is the number of bytes between the start of a row
-and the start of the next row.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Distance between row starts.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_width">
-<description>
-Queries the width of a pixbuf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Width in pixels.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_close">
-<description>
-Informs a pixbuf loader that no further writes with
-gdk_pixbuf_loader_write() will occur, so that it can free its
-internal loading structures. Also, tries to parse any data that
-hasn't yet been parsed; if the remaining data is partial or
-corrupt, an error will be returned. If %FALSE is returned, @error
-will be set to an error from the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR or #G_FILE_ERROR
-domains. If you're just cancelling a load rather than expecting it
-to be finished, passing %NULL for @error to ignore it is
-reasonable.
-
-Remember that this does not unref the loader, so if you plan not to
-use it anymore, please g_object_unref() it.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL to ignore errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if all image data written so far was successfully
- passed out via the update_area signal
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_animation">
-<description>
-Queries the #GdkPixbufAnimation that a pixbuf loader is currently creating.
-In general it only makes sense to call this function after the "area-prepared"
-signal has been emitted by the loader. If the loader doesn't have enough
-bytes yet (hasn't emitted the "area-prepared" signal) this function will
-return %NULL.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The #GdkPixbufAnimation that the loader is loading, or %NULL if
- not enough data has been read to determine the information.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_format">
-<description>
-Obtains the available information about the format of the
-currently loading image file.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbufFormat or %NULL. The return value is owned
-by GdkPixbuf and should not be freed.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_get_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Queries the #GdkPixbuf that a pixbuf loader is currently creating.
-In general it only makes sense to call this function after the
-"area-prepared" signal has been emitted by the loader; this means
-that enough data has been read to know the size of the image that
-will be allocated. If the loader has not received enough data via
-gdk_pixbuf_loader_write(), then this function returns %NULL. The
-returned pixbuf will be the same in all future calls to the loader,
-so simply calling g_object_ref() should be sufficient to continue
-using it. Additionally, if the loader is an animation, it will
-return the "static image" of the animation
-(see gdk_pixbuf_animation_get_static_image()).
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The #GdkPixbuf that the loader is creating, or %NULL if not
-enough data has been read to determine how to create the image buffer.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf loader object.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf loader.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_new_with_mime_type">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf loader object that always attempts to parse
-image data as if it were an image of mime type @mime_type, instead of
-identifying the type automatically. Useful if you want an error if
-the image isn't the expected mime type, for loading image formats
-that can't be reliably identified by looking at the data, or if
-the user manually forces a specific mime type.
-
-The list of supported mime types depends on what image loaders
-are installed, but typically "image/png", "image/jpeg", "image/gif",
-"image/tiff" and "image/x-xpixmap" are among the supported mime types.
-To obtain the full list of supported mime types, call
-gdk_pixbuf_format_get_mime_types() on each of the #GdkPixbufFormat
-structs returned by gdk_pixbuf_get_formats().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> the mime type to be loaded
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an allocated #GError, or %NULL to ignore errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf loader.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_new_with_type">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf loader object that always attempts to parse
-image data as if it were an image of type @image_type, instead of
-identifying the type automatically. Useful if you want an error if
-the image isn't the expected type, for loading image formats
-that can't be reliably identified by looking at the data, or if
-the user manually forces a specific type.
-
-The list of supported image formats depends on what image loaders
-are installed, but typically "png", "jpeg", "gif", "tiff" and
-"xpm" are among the supported formats. To obtain the full list of
-supported image formats, call gdk_pixbuf_format_get_name() on each
-of the #GdkPixbufFormat structs returned by gdk_pixbuf_get_formats().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image_type">
-<parameter_description> name of the image format to be loaded with the image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an allocated #GError, or %NULL to ignore errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf loader.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_set_size">
-<description>
-Causes the image to be scaled while it is loaded. The desired
-image size can be determined relative to the original size of
-the image by calling gdk_pixbuf_loader_set_size() from a
-signal handler for the ::size-prepared signal.
-
-Attempts to set the desired image size are ignored after the
-emission of the ::size-prepared signal.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> The desired width of the image being loaded.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> The desired height of the image being loaded.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_loader_write">
-<description>
-This will cause a pixbuf loader to parse the next @count bytes of
-an image. It will return %TRUE if the data was loaded successfully,
-and %FALSE if an error occurred. In the latter case, the loader
-will be closed, and will not accept further writes. If %FALSE is
-returned, @error will be set to an error from the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR
-or #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="loader">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf loader.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buf">
-<parameter_description> Pointer to image data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> Length of the @buf buffer in bytes.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the write was successful, or %FALSE if the loader
-cannot parse the buffer.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GdkPixbuf structure and allocates a buffer for it. The
-buffer has an optimal rowstride. Note that the buffer is not cleared;
-you will have to fill it completely yourself.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorspace">
-<parameter_description> Color space for image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_alpha">
-<parameter_description> Whether the image should have transparency information
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bits_per_sample">
-<parameter_description> Number of bits per color sample
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Width of image in pixels, must be > 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Height of image in pixels, must be > 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created #GdkPixbuf with a reference count of 1, or
-%NULL if not enough memory could be allocated for the image buffer.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_data">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GdkPixbuf out of in-memory image data. Currently only RGB
-images with 8 bits per sample are supported.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> Image data in 8-bit/sample packed format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="colorspace">
-<parameter_description> Colorspace for the image data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_alpha">
-<parameter_description> Whether the data has an opacity channel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bits_per_sample">
-<parameter_description> Number of bits per sample
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Width of the image in pixels, must be > 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> Height of the image in pixels, must be > 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rowstride">
-<parameter_description> Distance in bytes between row starts
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy_fn">
-<parameter_description> Function used to free the data when the pixbuf's reference count
-drops to zero, or %NULL if the data should not be freed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy_fn_data">
-<parameter_description> Closure data to pass to the destroy notification function
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created #GdkPixbuf structure with a reference count of 1.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from a file. The file format is
-detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then @error will be set.
-Possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or %NULL if
-any of several error conditions occurred: the file could not be opened,
-there was no loader for the file's format, there was not enough memory to
-allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained invalid data.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_scale">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from a file. The file format is
-detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then @error will be set.
-Possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and #G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-The image will be scaled to fit in the requested size, optionally preserving
-the image's aspect ratio.
-
-When preserving the aspect ratio, a @width of -1 will cause the image
-to be scaled to the exact given height, and a @height of -1 will cause
-the image to be scaled to the exact given width. When not preserving
-aspect ratio, a @width or @height of -1 means to not scale the image
-at all in that dimension. Negative values for @width and @height are
-allowed since 2.8.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> The width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> The height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preserve_aspect_ratio">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to preserve the image's aspect ratio
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or %NULL
-if any of several error conditions occurred: the file could not be opened,
-there was no loader for the file's format, there was not enough memory to
-allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained invalid data.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_size">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from a file.
-The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
- error will be set. Possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and
-#G_FILE_ERROR domains.
-
-The image will be scaled to fit in the requested size, preserving
-the image's aspect ratio. Note that the returned pixbuf may be smaller
-than @width x @height, if the aspect ratio requires it. To load
-and image at the requested size, regardless of aspect ratio, use
-gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_scale().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> Name of file to load, in the GLib file name encoding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> The width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> The height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1, or
-%NULL if any of several error conditions occurred: the file could not
-be opened, there was no loader for the file's format, there was not
-enough memory to allocate the image buffer, or the image file contained
-invalid data.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline">
-<description>
-Create a #GdkPixbuf from a flat representation that is suitable for
-storing as inline data in a program. This is useful if you want to
-ship a program with images, but don't want to depend on any
-external files.
-
-gdk-pixbuf ships with a program called <command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>
-which allows for conversion of #GdkPixbufs into such a inline representation.
-In almost all cases, you should pass the <option>--raw</option> flag to
-<command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>. A sample invocation would be:
-
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gdk-pixbuf-csource --raw --name=myimage_inline myimage.png
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-For the typical case where the inline pixbuf is read-only static data,
-you don't need to copy the pixel data unless you intend to write to
-it, so you can pass %FALSE for @copy_pixels. (If you pass
-<option>--rle</option> to <command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>, a copy
-will be made even if @copy_pixels is %FALSE, so using this option is
-generally a bad idea.)
-
-If you create a pixbuf from const inline data compiled into your
-program, it's probably safe to ignore errors and disable length checks,
-since things will always succeed:
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-pixbuf = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline (-1, myimage_inline, FALSE, NULL);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-For non-const inline data, you could get out of memory. For untrusted
-inline data located at runtime, you could have corrupt inline data in
-addition.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="data_length">
-<parameter_description> Length in bytes of the @data argument or -1 to
-disable length checks
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> Byte data containing a serialized #GdkPixdata structure
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="copy_pixels">
-<parameter_description> Whether to copy the pixel data, or use direct pointers
- data for the resulting pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> #GError return location, may be %NULL to ignore errors
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created #GdkPixbuf structure with a reference,
-count of 1, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from an input stream.
-
-The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
- error will be set. The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation
-from another thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error
-%GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED will be returned. Other possible errors are in
-the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
-
-The stream is not closed.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GInputStream to load the pixbuf from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or %NULL if any of several error
-conditions occurred: the file could not be opened, the image format is
-not supported, there was not enough memory to allocate the image buffer,
-the stream contained invalid data, or the operation was cancelled.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_async">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by asynchronously loading an image from an input stream.
-
-For more details see gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream(), which is the synchronous
-version of this function.
-
-When the operation is finished, @callback will be called in the main thread.
-You can then call gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_finish() to get the result of the operation.
-
-Since: 2.24
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GInputStream from which to load the pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a #GAsyncReadyCallback to call when the the pixbuf is loaded
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> the data to pass to the callback function
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_at_scale">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by loading an image from an input stream.
-
-The file format is detected automatically. If %NULL is returned, then
- error will be set. The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation
-from another thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error
-%GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED will be returned. Other possible errors are in
-the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
-
-The image will be scaled to fit in the requested size, optionally
-preserving the image's aspect ratio. When preserving the aspect ratio,
-a @width of -1 will cause the image to be scaled to the exact given
-height, and a @height of -1 will cause the image to be scaled to the
-exact given width. When not preserving aspect ratio, a @width or
- height of -1 means to not scale the image at all in that dimension.
-
-The stream is not closed.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GInputStream to load the pixbuf from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> The width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> The height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preserve_aspect_ratio">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to preserve the image's aspect ratio
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for an error
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf, or %NULL if any of several error
-conditions occurred: the file could not be opened, the image format is
-not supported, there was not enough memory to allocate the image buffer,
-the stream contained invalid data, or the operation was cancelled.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_at_scale_async">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by asynchronously loading an image from an input stream.
-
-For more details see gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_at_scale(), which is the synchronous
-version of this function.
-
-When the operation is finished, @callback will be called in the main thread.
-You can then call gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_finish() to get the result of the operation.
-
-Since: 2.24
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GInputStream from which to load the pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width the image should have or -1 to not constrain the width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height the image should have or -1 to not constrain the height
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preserve_aspect_ratio">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to preserve the image's aspect ratio
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a #GAsyncReadyCallback to call when the the pixbuf is loaded
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> the data to pass to the callback function
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_finish">
-<description>
-Finishes an asynchronous pixbuf creation operation started with
-gdk_pixbuf_new_from_stream_async().
-
-Since: 2.24
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="async_result">
-<parameter_description> a #GAsyncResult
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a #GError, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkPixbuf or %NULL on error. Free the returned
-object with g_object_unref().
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf by parsing XPM data in memory. This data is commonly
-the result of including an XPM file into a program's C source.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> Pointer to inline XPM data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference count of 1.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_new_subpixbuf">
-<description>
-Creates a new pixbuf which represents a sub-region of
- src_pixbuf The new pixbuf shares its pixels with the
-original pixbuf, so writing to one affects both.
-The new pixbuf holds a reference to @src_pixbuf, so
- src_pixbuf will not be finalized until the new pixbuf
-is finalized.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src_pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_x">
-<parameter_description> X coord in @src_pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="src_y">
-<parameter_description> Y coord in @src_pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of region in @src_pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of region in @src_pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new pixbuf
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_ref">
-<description>
-Adds a reference to a pixbuf.
-
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_ref().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The same as the @pixbuf argument.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_rotate_simple">
-<description>
-Rotates a pixbuf by a multiple of 90 degrees, and returns the
-result in a new pixbuf.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="angle">
-<parameter_description> the angle to rotate by
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
-allocated for it.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_saturate_and_pixelate">
-<description>
-Modifies saturation and optionally pixelates @src, placing the result in
- dest @src and @dest may be the same pixbuf with no ill effects. If
- saturation is 1.0 then saturation is not changed. If it's less than 1.0,
-saturation is reduced (the image turns toward grayscale); if greater than
-1.0, saturation is increased (the image gets more vivid colors). If @pixelate
-is %TRUE, then pixels are faded in a checkerboard pattern to create a
-pixelated image. @src and @dest must have the same image format, size, and
-rowstride.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> source image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> place to write modified version of @src
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="saturation">
-<parameter_description> saturation factor
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixelate">
-<parameter_description> whether to pixelate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a file in format @type. By default, "jpeg", "png", "ico"
-and "bmp" are possible file formats to save in, but more formats may be
-installed. The list of all writable formats can be determined in the
-following way:
-
-|[
-void add_if_writable (GdkPixbufFormat *data, GSList **list)
-{
-if (gdk_pixbuf_format_is_writable (data))
-*list = g_slist_prepend (*list, data);
-}
-
-GSList *formats = gdk_pixbuf_get_formats ();
-GSList *writable_formats = NULL;
-g_slist_foreach (formats, add_if_writable, &writable_formats);
-g_slist_free (formats);
-]|
-
-If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned. Possible errors include
-those in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR domain and those in the #G_FILE_ERROR domain.
-
-The variable argument list should be %NULL-terminated; if not empty,
-it should contain pairs of strings that modify the save
-parameters. For example:
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gdk_pixbuf_save (pixbuf, handle, "jpeg", &error,
-"quality", "100", NULL);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-Currently only few parameters exist. JPEG images can be saved with a
-"quality" parameter; its value should be in the range [0,100].
-
-Text chunks can be attached to PNG images by specifying parameters of
-the form "tEXt::key", where key is an ASCII string of length 1-79.
-The values are UTF-8 encoded strings. The PNG compression level can
-be specified using the "compression" parameter; it's value is in an
-integer in the range of [0,9].
-
-ICC color profiles can also be embedded into PNG and TIFF images.
-The "icc-profile" value should be the complete ICC profile encoded
-into base64.
-
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gchar *contents;
-gchar *contents_encode;
-gsize length;
-g_file_get_contents ("/home/hughsie/.color/icc/L225W.icm", &contents, &length, NULL);
-contents_encode = g_base64_encode ((const guchar *) contents, length);
-gdk_pixbuf_save (pixbuf, handle, "png", &error,
-"icc-profile", contents_encode,
-NULL);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
-
-TIFF images recognize a "compression" option which acceps an integer value.
-Among the codecs are 1 None, 2 Huffman, 5 LZW, 7 JPEG and 8 Deflate, see
-the libtiff documentation and tiff.h for all supported codec values.
-
-ICO images can be saved in depth 16, 24, or 32, by using the "depth"
-parameter. When the ICO saver is given "x_hot" and "y_hot" parameters,
-it produces a CUR instead of an ICO.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> name of file to save.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_buffer">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a new buffer in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
-"png", "tiff", "ico" or "bmp". This is a convenience function that uses
-gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callback() to do the real work. Note that the buffer
-is not nul-terminated and may contain embedded nuls.
-If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned and @buffer will be set to
-%NULL. Possible errors include those in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR
-domain.
-
-See gdk_pixbuf_save() for more details.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> location to receive a pointer to the new buffer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer_size">
-<parameter_description> location to receive the size of the new buffer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_bufferv">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a new buffer in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
-"tiff", "png", "ico" or "bmp". See gdk_pixbuf_save_to_buffer()
-for more details.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> location to receive a pointer to the new buffer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer_size">
-<parameter_description> location to receive the size of the new buffer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_keys">
-<parameter_description> name of options to set, %NULL-terminated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_values">
-<parameter_description> values for named options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callback">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf in format @type by feeding the produced data to a
-callback. Can be used when you want to store the image to something
-other than a file, such as an in-memory buffer or a socket.
-If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned. Possible errors
-include those in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR domain and whatever the save
-function generates.
-
-See gdk_pixbuf_save() for more details.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="save_func">
-<parameter_description> a function that is called to save each block of data that
-the save routine generates.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to the save function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callbackv">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a callback in format @type, which is currently "jpeg",
-"png", "tiff", "ico" or "bmp". If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned. See
-gdk_pixbuf_save_to_callback () for more details.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="save_func">
-<parameter_description> a function that is called to save each block of data that
-the save routine generates.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to the save function.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_keys">
-<parameter_description> name of options to set, %NULL-terminated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_values">
-<parameter_description> values for named options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_stream">
-<description>
-Saves @pixbuf to an output stream.
-
-Supported file formats are currently "jpeg", "tiff", "png", "ico" or
-"bmp". See gdk_pixbuf_save_to_buffer() for more details.
-
-The @cancellable can be used to abort the operation from another
-thread. If the operation was cancelled, the error %GIO_ERROR_CANCELLED
-will be returned. Other possible errors are in the #GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR
-and %G_IO_ERROR domains.
-
-The stream is not closed.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GOutputStream to save the pixbuf to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the pixbuf was saved successfully, %FALSE if an
-error was set.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_stream_async">
-<description>
-Saves @pixbuf to an output stream asynchronously.
-
-For more details see gdk_pixbuf_save_to_stream(), which is the synchronous
-version of this function.
-
-When the operation is finished, @callback will be called in the main thread.
-You can then call gdk_pixbuf_save_to_stream_finish() to get the result of the operation.
-
-Since: 2.24
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> a #GOutputStream to which to save the pixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cancellable">
-<parameter_description> optional #GCancellable object, %NULL to ignore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a #GAsyncReadyCallback to call when the the pixbuf is loaded
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> the data to pass to the callback function
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> list of key-value save options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_save_to_stream_finish">
-<description>
-Finishes an asynchronous pixbuf save operation started with
-gdk_pixbuf_save_to_stream_async().
-
-Since: 2.24
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="async_result">
-<parameter_description> a #GAsyncResult
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a #GError, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the pixbuf was saved successfully, %FALSE if an error was set.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_savev">
-<description>
-Saves pixbuf to a file in @type, which is currently "jpeg", "png", "tiff", "ico" or "bmp".
-If @error is set, %FALSE will be returned.
-See gdk_pixbuf_save () for more details.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> name of file to save.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> name of file format.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_keys">
-<parameter_description> name of options to set, %NULL-terminated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="option_values">
-<parameter_description> values for named options
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an error was set
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_scale">
-<description>
-Creates a transformation of the source image @src by scaling by
- scale_x and @scale_y then translating by @offset_x and @offset_y,
-then renders the rectangle (@dest_x, @dest_y, @dest_width,
- dest_height) of the resulting image onto the destination image
-replacing the previous contents.
-
-Try to use gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple() first, this function is
-the industrial-strength power tool you can fall back to if
-gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple() isn't powerful enough.
-
-If the source rectangle overlaps the destination rectangle on the
-same pixbuf, it will be overwritten during the scaling which
-results in rendering artifacts.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf into which to render the results
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_x">
-<parameter_description> the left coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_y">
-<parameter_description> the top coordinate for region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the region to render
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_x">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the X direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="offset_y">
-<parameter_description> the offset in the Y direction (currently rounded to an integer)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_x">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the X direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale_y">
-<parameter_description> the scale factor in the Y direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple">
-<description>
-Create a new #GdkPixbuf containing a copy of @src scaled to
- dest_width x @dest_height. Leaves @src unaffected. @interp_type
-should be #GDK_INTERP_NEAREST if you want maximum speed (but when
-scaling down #GDK_INTERP_NEAREST is usually unusably ugly). The
-default @interp_type should be #GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR which offers
-reasonable quality and speed.
-
-You can scale a sub-portion of @src by creating a sub-pixbuf
-pointing into @src; see gdk_pixbuf_new_subpixbuf().
-
-For more complicated scaling/compositing see gdk_pixbuf_scale()
-and gdk_pixbuf_composite().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="src">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_width">
-<parameter_description> the width of destination image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dest_height">
-<parameter_description> the height of destination image
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="interp_type">
-<parameter_description> the interpolation type for the transformation.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if not enough memory could be
-allocated for it.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_set_option">
-<description>
-Attaches a key/value pair as an option to a #GdkPixbuf. If %key already
-exists in the list of options attached to @pixbuf, the new value is
-ignored and %FALSE is returned.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a nul-terminated string.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_add_frame">
-<description>
-Adds a new frame to @animation. The @pixbuf must
-have the dimensions specified when the animation
-was constructed.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the pixbuf to add
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_get_loop">
-<description>
-Gets whether @animation should loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the animation loops forever, %FALSE otherwise
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new, empty animation.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the animation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the animation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rate">
-<parameter_description> the speed of the animation, in frames per second
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
-
-</return>
-</function>
+updated accordingly.
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_simple_anim_set_loop">
-<description>
-Sets whether @animation should loop indefinitely when it reaches the end.
+You shouldn't call this function explicitely if you are using
+gtk_init(), gtk_init_check(), gdk_init(), or gdk_init_check().
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbufSimpleAnim
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> the number of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="loop">
-<parameter_description> whether to loop the animation
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> the array of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixbuf_unref">
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_from_surface">
<description>
-Removes a reference from a pixbuf.
+Transfers image data from a #cairo_surface_t and converts it to an RGB(A)
+representation inside a #GdkPixbuf. This allows you to efficiently read
+individual pixels from cairo surfaces. For #GdkWindows, use
+gdk_pixbuf_get_from_window() instead.
+
+This function will create an RGB pixbuf with 8 bits per channel.
+The pixbuf will contain an alpha channel if the @surface contains one.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_unref().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A pixbuf.
+<parameter name="surface">
+<parameter_description> surface to copy from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixdata_deserialize">
-<description>
-Deserializes (reconstruct) a #GdkPixdata structure from a byte stream.
-The byte stream consists of a straightforward writeout of the
-#GdkPixdata fields in network byte order, plus the @pixel_data
-bytes the structure points to.
-The @pixdata contents are reconstructed byte by byte and are checked
-for validity. This function may fail with %GDK_PIXBUF_CORRUPT_IMAGE
-or %GDK_PIXBUF_ERROR_UNKNOWN_TYPE.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata structure to be filled in.
+<parameter name="src_x">
+<parameter_description> Source X coordinate within @surface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stream_length">
-<parameter_description> length of the stream used for deserialization.
+<parameter name="src_y">
+<parameter_description> Source Y coordinate within @surface
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stream">
-<parameter_description> stream of bytes containing a serialized #GdkPixdata structure.
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Width in pixels of region to get
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> #GError location to indicate failures (maybe %NULL to ignore errors).
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> Height in pixels of region to get
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> Upon successful deserialization %TRUE is returned,
-%FALSE otherwise.
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference
+count of 1, or %NULL on error
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gdk_pixdata_from_pixbuf">
+<function name="gdk_pixbuf_get_from_window">
<description>
-Converts a #GdkPixbuf to a #GdkPixdata. If @use_rle is %TRUE, the
-pixel data is run-length encoded into newly-allocated memory and a
-pointer to that memory is returned.
+Transfers image data from a #GdkWindow and converts it to an RGB(A)
+representation inside a #GdkPixbuf. In other words, copies
+image data from a server-side drawable to a client-side RGB(A) buffer.
+This allows you to efficiently read individual pixels on the client side.
+This function will create an RGB pixbuf with 8 bits per channel with
+the same size specified by the @width and @height arguments. The pixbuf
+will contain an alpha channel if the @window contains one.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata to fill.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the data to fill @pixdata with.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_rle">
-<parameter_description> whether to use run-length encoding for the pixel data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> If @ure_rle is %TRUE, a pointer to the newly-allocated memory
-for the run-length encoded pixel data, otherwise %NULL.
-</return>
-</function>
+If the window is off the screen, then there is no image data in the
+obscured/offscreen regions to be placed in the pixbuf. The contents of
+portions of the pixbuf corresponding to the offscreen region are undefined.
-<function name="gdk_pixdata_serialize">
-<description>
-Serializes a #GdkPixdata structure into a byte stream.
-The byte stream consists of a straightforward writeout of the
-#GdkPixdata fields in network byte order, plus the @pixel_data
-bytes the structure points to.
+If the window you're obtaining data from is partially obscured by
+other windows, then the contents of the pixbuf areas corresponding
+to the obscured regions are undefined.
+
+If the window is not mapped (typically because it's iconified/minimized
+or not on the current workspace), then %NULL will be returned.
+
+If memory can't be allocated for the return value, %NULL will be returned
+instead.
+
+(In short, there are several ways this function can fail, and if it fails
+it returns %NULL; so check the return value.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GdkPixdata structure to serialize.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> Source window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stream_length_p">
-<parameter_description> location to store the resulting stream length in.
+<parameter name="src_x">
+<parameter_description> Source X coordinate within @window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly-allocated string containing the serialized
-#GdkPixdata structure.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gdk_pixdata_to_csource">
-<description>
-Generates C source code suitable for compiling images directly
-into programs.
-
-gdk-pixbuf ships with a program called <command>gdk-pixbuf-csource</command>
-which offers a command line interface to this function.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixdata">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdata to convert to C source.
+<parameter name="src_y">
+<parameter_description> Source Y coordinate within @window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> used for naming generated data structures or macros.
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Width in pixels of region to get
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="dump_type">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixdataDumpType determining the kind of C
-source to be generated.
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> Height in pixels of region to get
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated string containing the C source form
-of @pixdata.
+<return> A newly-created pixbuf with a reference
+count of 1, or %NULL on error
</return>
</function>
@@ -7819,7 +5535,6 @@ and %GDK_NONE will be stored in @actual_property_type.
<para>
The XGetWindowProperty() function that gdk_property_get()
uses has a very confusing and complicated set of semantics.
-uses has a very confusing and complicated set of semantics.
Unfortunately, gdk_property_get() makes the situation
worse instead of better (the semantics should be considered
undefined), and also prints warnings to stderr in cases where it
@@ -8306,7 +6021,7 @@ a monitor close to (@x,@y) if the point is not in any monitor.
<function name="gdk_screen_get_monitor_at_window">
<description>
-Returns the number of the monitor in which the largest area of the
+Returns the number of the monitor in which the largest area of the
bounding rectangle of @window resides.
Since: 2.2
@@ -8325,6 +6040,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<return> the monitor number in which most of @window is located,
or if @window does not intersect any monitors, a monitor,
close to @window.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -8333,6 +6049,9 @@ close to @window.
Retrieves the #GdkRectangle representing the size and position of
the individual monitor within the entire screen area.
+Monitor numbers start at 0. To obtain the number of monitors of
+ screen, use gdk_screen_get_n_monitors().
+
Note that the size of the entire screen area can be retrieved via
gdk_screen_get_width() and gdk_screen_get_height().
@@ -8345,11 +6064,12 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="monitor_num">
-<parameter_description> the monitor number, between 0 and gdk_screen_get_n_monitors (screen)
+<parameter_description> the monitor number
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="dest">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle to be filled with the monitor geometry
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle to be filled with
+the monitor geometry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8425,6 +6145,39 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_screen_get_monitor_workarea">
+<description>
+Retrieves the #GdkRectangle representing the size and position of
+the "work area" on a monitor within the entire screen area.
+
+The work area should be considered when positioning menus and
+similar popups, to avoid placing them below panels, docks or other
+desktop components.
+
+Monitor numbers start at 0. To obtain the number of monitors of
+ screen, use gdk_screen_get_n_monitors().
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="monitor_num">
+<parameter_description> the monitor number
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dest">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle to be filled with
+the monitor workarea
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_screen_get_n_monitors">
<description>
Returns the number of monitors which @screen consists of.
@@ -9371,7 +7124,7 @@ events pending. If the function returns %FALSE it is automatically
removed from the list of event sources and will not be called again.
This variant of g_idle_add_full() calls @function with the GDK lock
-held. It can be thought of a MT-safe version for GTK+ widgets for the
+held. It can be thought of a MT-safe version for GTK+ widgets for the
following use case, where you have to worry about idle_callback()
running in thread A and accessing @self after it has been finalized
in thread B:
@@ -9492,7 +7245,7 @@ SomeWidget *self = data;
self->timeout_id = 0;
-return FALSE;
+return G_SOURCE_REMOVE;
}
static void some_widget_do_stuff_later (SomeWidget *self)
@@ -9611,9 +7364,9 @@ range between #G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT_IDLE and #G_PRIORITY_HIGH_IDLE.
<function name="gdk_threads_enter">
<description>
-This macro marks the beginning of a critical section in which GDK and
-GTK+ functions can be called safely and without causing race
-conditions. Only one thread at a time can be in such a critial
+This function marks the beginning of a critical section in which
+GDK and GTK+ functions can be called safely and without causing race
+conditions. Only one thread at a time can be in such a critial
section.
</description>
@@ -9626,7 +7379,6 @@ section.
<description>
Initializes GDK so that it can be used from multiple threads
in conjunction with gdk_threads_enter() and gdk_threads_leave().
-g_thread_init() must be called previous to this function.
This call must be made before any use of the main loop from
GTK+; to be safe, call it before gtk_init().
@@ -10079,6 +7831,21 @@ skipped in the output.)
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_wayland_window_update_size">
+<description>
+Updates the state of the drawable (in particular the drawable's
+cairo surface) when its size has changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawableImplWayland.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_window_add_filter">
<description>
Adds an event filter to @window, allowing you to intercept events
@@ -10158,13 +7925,48 @@ Since: 2.12
<function name="gdk_window_begin_move_drag">
<description>
-Begins a window move operation (for a toplevel window). You might
-use this function to implement a "window move grip," for
+Begins a window move operation (for a toplevel window).
+
+This function assumes that the drag is controlled by the
+client pointer device, use gdk_window_begin_move_drag_for_device()
+to begin a drag with a different device.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button being used to drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> root window X coordinate of mouse click that began the drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> root window Y coordinate of mouse click that began the drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="timestamp">
+<parameter_description> timestamp of mouse click that began the drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_window_begin_move_drag_for_device">
+<description>
+Begins a window move operation (for a toplevel window).
+You might use this function to implement a "window move grip," for
example. The function works best with window managers that support
the <ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended
Window Manager Hints</ulink>, but has a fallback implementation for
other window managers.
+Since: 3.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10172,6 +7974,10 @@ other window managers.
<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> the device used for the operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="button">
<parameter_description> the button being used to drag
</parameter_description>
@@ -10272,11 +8078,50 @@ gdk_window_begin_paint_region().
<function name="gdk_window_begin_resize_drag">
<description>
Begins a window resize operation (for a toplevel window).
+
+This function assumes that the drag is controlled by the
+client pointer device, use gdk_window_begin_resize_drag_for_device()
+to begin a drag with a different device.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="edge">
+<parameter_description> the edge or corner from which the drag is started
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button being used to drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> root window X coordinate of mouse click that began the drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> root window Y coordinate of mouse click that began the drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="timestamp">
+<parameter_description> timestamp of mouse click that began the drag (use gdk_event_get_time())
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gdk_window_begin_resize_drag_for_device">
+<description>
+Begins a window resize operation (for a toplevel window).
You might use this function to implement a "window resize grip," for
example; in fact #GtkStatusbar uses it. The function works best
with window managers that support the <ulink url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window Manager Hints</ulink>, but has a
fallback implementation for other window managers.
+Since: 3.4
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10288,6 +8133,10 @@ fallback implementation for other window managers.
<parameter_description> the edge or corner from which the drag is started
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> the device used for the operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="button">
<parameter_description> the button being used to drag
</parameter_description>
@@ -12430,6 +10279,8 @@ implementing a custom widget.)
See also gdk_window_set_background_pattern().
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gdk_window_set_background_rgba() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
@@ -13643,6 +11494,7 @@ XInput 2), but calling this function on any slave devices (i.e.
those managed via XInput 1.x), will return 0.
</note>
+Since: 3.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13652,6 +11504,7 @@ those managed via XInput 1.x), will return 0.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the XInput2 device ID.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -13659,6 +11512,7 @@ those managed via XInput 1.x), will return 0.
<description>
Returns the #GdkDevice that wraps the given device ID.
+Since: 3.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13673,6 +11527,7 @@ Returns the #GdkDevice that wraps the given device ID.
</parameters>
<return> The #GdkDevice wrapping the device ID,
or %NULL if the given ID doesn't currently represent a device.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -13834,7 +11689,8 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an X display.
+<return> an X display
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -14352,12 +12208,13 @@ Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the position of @screen among the screens of
-its display.
+<return> the position of @screen among the screens
+of its display
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -14390,11 +12247,12 @@ Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> an Xlib <type>Screen*</type>
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -14595,6 +12453,32 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_x11_window_set_hide_titlebar_when_maximized">
+<description>
+Set a hint for the window manager, requesting that the titlebar
+should be hidden when the window is maximized.
+
+Note that this property is automatically updated by GTK+, so this
+function should only be used by applications which do not use GTK+
+to create toplevel windows.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hide_titlebar_when_maximized">
+<parameter_description> whether to hide the titlebar when
+maximized
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_x11_window_set_theme_variant">
<description>
GTK+ applications can request a dark theme variant. In order to
@@ -14654,6 +12538,32 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gdk_x11_window_set_utf8_property">
+<description>
+This function modifies or removes an arbitrary X11 window
+property of type UTF8_STRING. If the given @window is
+not a toplevel window, it is ignored.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> Property name, will be interned as an X atom
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> Property value, or %NULL to delete
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gdk_x11_xatom_to_atom">
<description>
Convert from an X atom for the default display to the corresponding
diff --git a/gdk/src/screen.hg b/gdk/src/screen.hg
index 03de064..f804904 100644
--- a/gdk/src/screen.hg
+++ b/gdk/src/screen.hg
@@ -108,9 +108,6 @@ public:
//We use no_default_handler because GdkDisplayManagerClass is private.
- /** The size_changed signal is emitted when the pixel width or
- * height of a screen changes.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void size_changed(), size-changed, no_default_handler)
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void composited_changed(), composited-changed, no_default_handler)
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void monitors_changed(), monitors-changed, no_default_handler)
diff --git a/gtk/src/action.hg b/gtk/src/action.hg
index bc99cc9..78b5432 100644
--- a/gtk/src/action.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/action.hg
@@ -178,8 +178,6 @@ public:
/// For instance, void on_activate();
typedef sigc::slot<void> SlotActivate;
- /** The "activate" signal is emitted when the action is activated.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void activate(), "activate")
//Used by AccelGroup:
diff --git a/gtk/src/actiongroup.hg b/gtk/src/actiongroup.hg
index 908a09d..c4f4297 100644
--- a/gtk/src/actiongroup.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/actiongroup.hg
@@ -85,53 +85,8 @@ public:
//These are also just C convenience methods that are useless unless you are using the other convenience methods:
_IGNORE(gtk_action_group_set_translate_func, gtk_action_group_set_translation_domain)
- /** The connect_proxy signal is emitted after connecting a proxy to
- * an action in the group. Note that the proxy may have been connected
- * to a different action before.
- *
- * This is intended for simple customizations for which a custom action
- * class would be too clumsy, e.g. showing tooltips for menuitems in the
- * statusbar.
- *
- * UIManager proxies the signal and provides global notification
- * just before any action is connected to a proxy, which is probably more
- * convenient to use.
- *
- * @param action the action
- * @param proxy the proxy
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void connect_proxy(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action, Widget* proxy), "connect_proxy", no_default_handler)
-
- /** The disconnect_proxy signal is emitted after disconnecting a proxy
- * from an action in the group.
- *
- * UIManager proxies the signal and provides global notification
- * just before any action is connected to a proxy, which is probably more
- * convenient to use.
- *
- * @param action the action
- * @param proxy the proxy
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void disconnect_proxy(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action, Widget* proxy), "disconnect_proxy", no_default_handler)
-
- /** The pre_activate signal is emitted just before the @action in the
- * action_group is activated
- *
- * This is intended for UIManager to proxy the signal and provide global
- * notification just before any action is activated.
- *
- * @action the action
- */
- _WRAP_SIGNAL(void pre_activate(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action), "pre_activate", no_default_handler)
-
- /** The post_activate signal is emitted just after the @action in the
- * @action_group is activated
- *
- * This is intended for UIManager to proxy the signal and provide global
- * notification just after any action is activated.
- *
- * @param action the action
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void post_activate(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action), "post_activate", no_default_handler)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("name", Glib::ustring)
diff --git a/gtk/src/cellrenderer.hg b/gtk/src/cellrenderer.hg
index 4ddea88..678736a 100644
--- a/gtk/src/cellrenderer.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/cellrenderer.hg
@@ -117,34 +117,14 @@ public:
*/
virtual Glib::PropertyProxy_Base _property_renderable();
- /** This signal is emitted when the user cancels the process of editing a
- * cell. For example, an editable cell renderer could be written to cancel
- * editing when the user presses Escape.
- *
- * @see editing_canceled()
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void editing_canceled(), editing_canceled)
#m4 _CONVERSION(`const char*',`const Glib::ustring&',__GCHARP_TO_USTRING)
- //TODO: Remove the warning in the documentation when we have fixed the inheritance of CellRendererCombo.
- /** This signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.
- * The indended use of this signal is to do special setup
- * on @a editable, e.g. adding an EntryCompletion or setting
- * up additional columns in a ComboBox.
- *
- * Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
- * continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future
- * releases, therefore you should check the type of @a editable
- * before doing any specific setup.
- *
- * Note that this signal does not work yet in gtkmm.
+ //TODO: Remove the warning in the documentation when we have fixed the
+ //inheritance of CellRendererCombo.
+ /** Note that this signal does not work yet in gtkmm.
* See http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=301597
- *
- * @newin{2,6}
- *
- * @param editable the CellEditable.
- * @param path the path identifying the edited cell.
*/
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void editing_started(CellEditable* editable, const Glib::ustring& path), editing_started)
diff --git a/gtk/src/cellrenderertoggle.hg b/gtk/src/cellrenderertoggle.hg
index 5cff6aa..3e0bd93 100644
--- a/gtk/src/cellrenderertoggle.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/cellrenderertoggle.hg
@@ -51,10 +51,7 @@ public:
#m4 _CONVERSION(`const char*',`const Glib::ustring&',__GCHARP_TO_USTRING)
//TODO: Maybe the parameter should be a TreePath.
- /** The toggled signal is emitted when the cell is toggled.
- *
- * @param path string representation of TreePath describing the event location
- */
+
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void toggled(const Glib::ustring& path), "toggled")
_WRAP_PROPERTY("activatable", bool)
diff --git a/gtk/src/checkmenuitem.hg b/gtk/src/checkmenuitem.hg
index 3d93589..14094ff 100644
--- a/gtk/src/checkmenuitem.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/checkmenuitem.hg
@@ -54,10 +54,6 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void set_draw_as_radio(bool draw_as_radio = true), gtk_check_menu_item_set_draw_as_radio)
_WRAP_METHOD(bool get_draw_as_radio() const, gtk_check_menu_item_get_draw_as_radio)
- /** Triggered when the item changes state
- * (Note : changing the item's state with set_active() will also trigger
- * this signal)
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void toggled(), "toggled")
_WRAP_PROPERTY("active", bool)
diff --git a/gtk/src/colorbutton.hg b/gtk/src/colorbutton.hg
index cc09407..a4c7c16 100644
--- a/gtk/src/colorbutton.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/colorbutton.hg
@@ -128,10 +128,6 @@ public:
_WRAP_PROPERTY("rgba", Gdk::RGBA)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("alpha", guint16) //Todo: Remove thsi when we remove the "color" property too.
- /** The color_set signal is emitted when the user selects a color. When handling this signal,
- * use get_color() and get_alpha() to find out which color
- * was just selected.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void color_set(), "color-set")
};
diff --git a/gtk/src/combobox.hg b/gtk/src/combobox.hg
index b1422df..108625d 100644
--- a/gtk/src/combobox.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/combobox.hg
@@ -224,11 +224,6 @@ public:
_WRAP_PROPERTY("id-column", int)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("active-id", Glib::ustring)
- /** The changed signal gets emitted when the active
- * item is changed. This can be due to the user selecting
- * a different item from the list, or due to a
- * call to set_active_iter().
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void changed(), "changed")
//Key-binding signals:
diff --git a/gtk/src/entrycompletion.hg b/gtk/src/entrycompletion.hg
index 7d2d8bc..0419329 100644
--- a/gtk/src/entrycompletion.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/entrycompletion.hg
@@ -135,10 +135,6 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void set_text_column(int column), gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column)
_WRAP_METHOD(int get_text_column() const, gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column)
- /** Emitted when an action is activated.
- *
- * @param index The index of the activated action.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void action_activated(int index), action_activated)
//We completely hand-code these signals because we want to change how the parameters are wrapped,
@@ -200,20 +196,6 @@ dnl
#m4 _CONVERSION(`const char*',`const Glib::ustring&',__GCHARP_TO_USTRING)
- /** Emitted when the inline autocompletion is triggered.
- * The default behaviour is to make the entry display the
- * whole prefix and select the newly inserted part.
- *
- * Applications may connect to this signal in order to insert only a
- * smaller part of the @a prefix into the entry - e.g. the entry used in
- * the FileChooser inserts only the part of the prefix up to the
- * next '/'.
- *
- * @newin{2,6}
- *
- * @param prefix The common prefix of all possible completions.
- * @result true if the signal has been handled
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool insert_prefix(const Glib::ustring& prefix), insert_prefix)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("model", Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::TreeModel>)
diff --git a/gtk/src/filechooser.hg b/gtk/src/filechooser.hg
index 959a57f..10adc4a 100644
--- a/gtk/src/filechooser.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/filechooser.hg
@@ -182,66 +182,10 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(std::vector<Glib::ustring> list_shortcut_folder_uris() const, gtk_file_chooser_list_shortcut_folder_uris)
- /** This signal is emitted when the current folder in a FileChooser
- * changes. This can happen due to the user performing some action that
- * changes folders, such as selecting a bookmark or visiting a folder on the
- * file list. It can also happen as a result of calling a function to
- * explicitly change the current folder in a file chooser.
- *
- * Normally you do not need to connect to this signal, unless you need to keep
- * track of which folder a file chooser is showing.
- *
- * @see set_current_folder(), get_current_folder(),
- * set_current_folder_uri(), get_current_folder_uri().
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void current_folder_changed(), "current_folder_changed", no_default_handler)
-
- /** This signal is emitted when there is a change in the set of selected files
- * in a #GtkFileChooser. This can happen when the user modifies the selection
- * with the mouse or the keyboard, or when explicitly calling functions to
- * change the selection.
- *
- * Normally you do not need to connect to this signal, as it is easier to wait
- * for the file chooser to finish running, and then to get the list of
- * selected files using the functions mentioned below.
- *
- * @see select_filename(), unselect_filename(), get_filename(),
- * get_filenames(), select_uri(),
- * unselect_uri(), get_uri(),
- * get_uris().
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void selection_changed(), "selection_changed", no_default_handler)
-
- /** This signal is emitted when the preview in a file chooser should be
- * regenerated. For example, this can happen when the currently selected file
- * changes. You should use this signal if you want your file chooser to have
- * a preview widget.
- *
- * Once you have installed a preview widget with
- * set_preview_widget(), you should update it when this
- * signal is emitted. You can use the functions
- * get_preview_filename() or get_preview_uri() to get the name of the file to preview.
- * Your widget may not be able to preview all kinds of files; your signal handler
- * must call set_preview_wiget_active() to inform the file
- * chooser about whether the preview was generated successfully or not.
- *
- * @see set_preview_widget(), set_preview_widget_active(),
- * set_use_preview_label(), get_preview_filename(), get_preview_uri().
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void update_preview(), "update_preview", no_default_handler)
-
- /** This signal is emitted when the user "activates" a file in the file
- * chooser. This can happen by double-clicking on a file in the file list, or
- * by pressing <keycap>Enter</keycap>.
- *
- * Normally you do not need to connect to this signal. It is used internally
- * by FileChooserDialog to know when to activate the default button in the
- * dialog.
- *
- * @see get_filename(), get_filenames(), get_uri(), get_uris().
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void file_activated(), "file_activated", no_default_handler)
-
_WRAP_SIGNAL(FileChooserConfirmation confirm_overwrite(), "confirm-overwrite", no_default_handler)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("action", FileChooserAction)
diff --git a/gtk/src/fontbutton.hg b/gtk/src/fontbutton.hg
index 276dbbb..79a1fe7 100644
--- a/gtk/src/fontbutton.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/fontbutton.hg
@@ -70,10 +70,7 @@ public:
_WRAP_PROPERTY("show-style", bool)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("show-size", bool)
- /** The font_set signal is emitted when the user selects a font. When handling this signal,
- * use get_font_name() to find out which font was just selected.
- */
- _WRAP_SIGNAL(void font_set(), "font-set")
+ _WRAP_SIGNAL(void font_set(), "font-set")
};
diff --git a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
index ca9f627..1660be5 100644
--- a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
+++ b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
@@ -1,4 +1,7730 @@
<root>
+<signal name="GtkAboutDialog::activate-link">
+<description>
+The signal which gets emitted to activate a URI.
+Applications may connect to it to override the default behaviour,
+which is to call gtk_show_uri().
+
+Since: 2.24
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The object on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI that is activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the link has been activated
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAccelGroup::accel-activate">
+<description>
+The accel-activate signal is an implementation detail of
+#GtkAccelGroup and not meant to be used by applications.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="acceleratable">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the accelerator was activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifier">
+<parameter_description> the modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator was activated
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAccelGroup::accel-changed">
+<description>
+The accel-changed signal is emitted when a #GtkAccelGroupEntry
+is added to or removed from the accel group.
+
+Widgets like #GtkAccelLabel which display an associated
+accelerator should connect to this signal, and rebuild
+their visual representation if the @accel_closure is theirs.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifier">
+<parameter_description> the modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_closure">
+<parameter_description> the #GClosure of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAccelMap::changed">
+<description>
+Notifies of a change in the global accelerator map.
+The path is also used as the detail for the signal,
+so it is possible to connect to
+changed::<replaceable>accel_path</replaceable>.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the global accel map object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> the path of the accelerator that changed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> the key value for the new accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> the modifier mask for the new accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAction::activate">
+<description>
+The "activate" signal is emitted when the action is activated.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkActionGroup::connect-proxy">
+<description>
+The ::connect-proxy signal is emitted after connecting a proxy to
+an action in the group. Note that the proxy may have been connected
+to a different action before.
+
+This is intended for simple customizations for which a custom action
+class would be too clumsy, e.g. showing tooltips for menuitems in the
+statusbar.
+
+#GtkUIManager proxies the signal and provides global notification
+just before any action is connected to a proxy, which is probably more
+convenient to use.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> the proxy
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkActionGroup::disconnect-proxy">
+<description>
+The ::disconnect-proxy signal is emitted after disconnecting a proxy
+from an action in the group.
+
+#GtkUIManager proxies the signal and provides global notification
+just before any action is connected to a proxy, which is probably more
+convenient to use.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> the proxy
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkActionGroup::post-activate">
+<description>
+The ::post-activate signal is emitted just after the @action in the
+ action_group is activated
+
+This is intended for #GtkUIManager to proxy the signal and provide global
+notification just after any action is activated.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkActionGroup::pre-activate">
+<description>
+The ::pre-activate signal is emitted just before the @action in the
+ action_group is activated
+
+This is intended for #GtkUIManager to proxy the signal and provide global
+notification just before any action is activated.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAdjustment::changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when one or more of the #GtkAdjustment fields have been changed,
+other than the value field.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAdjustment::value-changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the #GtkAdjustment value field has been changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAppChooserButton::custom-item-activated">
+<description>
+Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
+gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item(), is activated from the
+dropdown menu.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="item_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the activated item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAppChooserWidget::application-activated">
+<description>
+Emitted when an application item is activated from the widget's list.
+
+This usually happens when the user double clicks an item, or an item
+is selected and the user presses one of the keys Space, Shift+Space,
+Return or Enter.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the activated #GAppInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAppChooserWidget::application-selected">
+<description>
+Emitted when an application item is selected from the widget's list.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the selected #GAppInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAppChooserWidget::populate-popup">
+<description>
+Emitted when a context menu is about to popup over an application item.
+Clients can insert menu items into the provided #GtkMenu object in the
+callback of this signal; the context menu will be shown over the item
+if at least one item has been added to the menu.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkMenu to populate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the current #GAppInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkApplication::quit">
+<description>
+Emitted when the session manager wants the application to quit
+(generally because the user is logging out). The application
+should exit as soon as possible after receiving this signal; if
+it does not, the session manager may choose to forcibly kill it.
+
+Normally, an application would only be sent a ::quit if there
+are no inhibitors (see gtk_application_inhibit()).
+However, this is not guaranteed; in some situations the
+session manager may decide to end the session without giving
+applications a chance to object.
+
+To receive this signal, you need to set the
+#GtkApplication:register-session property
+when creating the application object.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkApplication::window-added">
+<description>
+Emitted when a #GtkWindow is added to @application through
+gtk_application_add_window().
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkApplication which emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the newly-added #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkApplication::window-removed">
+<description>
+Emitted when a #GtkWindow is removed from @application,
+either as a side-effect of being destroyed or explicitly
+through gtk_application_remove_window().
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkApplication which emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWindow that is being removed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAssistant::apply">
+<description>
+The ::apply signal is emitted when the apply button is clicked.
+
+The default behavior of the #GtkAssistant is to switch to the page
+after the current page, unless the current page is the last one.
+
+A handler for the ::apply signal should carry out the actions for
+which the wizard has collected data. If the action takes a long time
+to complete, you might consider putting a page of type
+%GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_PROGRESS after the confirmation page and handle
+this operation within the #GtkAssistant::prepare signal of the progress
+page.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAssistant::cancel">
+<description>
+The ::cancel signal is emitted when then the cancel button is clicked.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAssistant::close">
+<description>
+The ::close signal is emitted either when the close button of
+a summary page is clicked, or when the apply button in the last
+page in the flow (of type %GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONFIRM) is clicked.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkAssistant::prepare">
+<description>
+The ::prepare signal is emitted when a new page is set as the
+assistant's current page, before making the new page visible.
+
+A handler for this signal can do any preparations which are
+necessary before showing @page.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> the current page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkButton::activate">
+<description>
+The ::activate signal on GtkButton is an action signal and
+emitting it causes the button to animate press then release.
+Applications should never connect to this signal, but use the
+#GtkButton::clicked signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkButton::clicked">
+<description>
+Emitted when the button has been activated (pressed and released).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkButton::enter">
+<description>
+Emitted when the pointer enters the button.
+
+Deprecated: 2.8: Use the #GtkWidget::enter-notify-event signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkButton::image-spacing">
+<description>
+Spacing in pixels between the image and label.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkButton::leave">
+<description>
+Emitted when the pointer leaves the button.
+
+Deprecated: 2.8: Use the #GtkWidget::leave-notify-event signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkButton::pressed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the button is pressed.
+
+Deprecated: 2.8: Use the #GtkWidget::button-press-event signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkButton::released">
+<description>
+Emitted when the button is released.
+
+Deprecated: 2.8: Use the #GtkWidget::button-release-event signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCalendar::day-selected">
+<description>
+Emitted when the user selects a day.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCalendar::day-selected-double-click">
+<description>
+Emitted when the user double-clicks a day.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCalendar::month-changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the user clicks a button to change the selected month on a
+calendar.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCalendar::next-month">
+<description>
+Emitted when the user switched to the next month.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCalendar::next-year">
+<description>
+Emitted when user switched to the next year.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCalendar::prev-month">
+<description>
+Emitted when the user switched to the previous month.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCalendar::prev-year">
+<description>
+Emitted when user switched to the previous year.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellArea::add-editable">
+<description>
+Indicates that editing has started on @renderer and that @editable
+should be added to the owning cell-layouting widget at @cell_area.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellArea where editing started
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="renderer">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer that started the edited
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellEditable widget to add
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_area">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget relative #GdkRectangle coordinates
+where @editable should be added
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreePath string this edit was initiated for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellArea::apply-attributes">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted whenever applying attributes to @area from @model
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellArea to apply the attributes to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeModel to apply the attributes from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeIter indicating which row to apply the attributes of
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_expander">
+<parameter_description> whether the view shows children for this row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_expanded">
+<parameter_description> whether the view is currently showing the children of this row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellArea::focus-changed">
+<description>
+Indicates that focus changed on this @area. This signal
+is emitted either as a result of focus handling or event
+handling.
+
+It's possible that the signal is emitted even if the
+currently focused renderer did not change, this is
+because focus may change to the same renderer in the
+same cell area for a different row of data.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellArea where focus changed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="renderer">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer that has focus
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the current #GtkTreePath string set for @area
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellArea::remove-editable">
+<description>
+Indicates that editing finished on @renderer and that @editable
+should be removed from the owning cell-layouting widget.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellArea where editing finished
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="renderer">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer that finished editeding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellEditable widget to remove
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellEditable::editing-done">
+<description>
+This signal is a sign for the cell renderer to update its
+value from the @cell_editable.
+
+Implementations of #GtkCellEditable are responsible for
+emitting this signal when they are done editing, e.g.
+#GtkEntry is emitting it when the user presses Enter.
+
+gtk_cell_editable_editing_done() is a convenience method
+for emitting #GtkCellEditable::editing-done.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellEditable::remove-widget">
+<description>
+This signal is meant to indicate that the cell is finished
+editing, and the widget may now be destroyed.
+
+Implementations of #GtkCellEditable are responsible for
+emitting this signal when they are done editing. It must
+be emitted after the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal,
+to give the cell renderer a chance to update the cell's value
+before the widget is removed.
+
+gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget() is a convenience method
+for emitting #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled">
+<description>
+This signal gets emitted when the user cancels the process of editing a
+cell. For example, an editable cell renderer could be written to cancel
+editing when the user presses Escape.
+
+See also: gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="renderer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellRenderer::editing-started">
+<description>
+This signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.
+The intended use of this signal is to do special setup
+on @editable, e.g. adding a #GtkEntryCompletion or setting
+up additional columns in a #GtkComboBox.
+
+Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
+continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future
+releases, therefore you should check the type of @editable
+before doing any specific setup, as in the following example:
+|[
+static void
+text_editing_started (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
+GtkCellEditable *editable,
+const gchar *path,
+gpointer data)
+{
+if (GTK_IS_ENTRY (editable))
+{
+GtkEntry *entry = GTK_ENTRY (editable);
+
+/ * ... create a GtkEntryCompletion * /
+
+gtk_entry_set_completion (entry, completion);
+}
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="renderer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the path identifying the edited cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellRendererAccel::accel-cleared">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when the user has removed the accelerator.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel">
+<parameter_description> the object reveiving the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path_string">
+<parameter_description> the path identifying the row of the edited cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellRendererAccel::accel-edited">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when the user has selected a new accelerator.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel">
+<parameter_description> the object reveiving the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path_string">
+<parameter_description> the path identifying the row of the edited cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> the new accelerator keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> the new acclerator modifier mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hardware_keycode">
+<parameter_description> the keycode of the new accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellRendererCombo::changed">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted each time after the user selected an item in
+the combo box, either by using the mouse or the arrow keys. Contrary
+to GtkComboBox, GtkCellRendererCombo::changed is not emitted for
+changes made to a selected item in the entry. The argument @new_iter
+corresponds to the newly selected item in the combo box and it is relative
+to the GtkTreeModel set via the model property on GtkCellRendererCombo.
+
+Note that as soon as you change the model displayed in the tree view,
+the tree view will immediately cease the editing operating. This
+means that you most probably want to refrain from changing the model
+until the combo cell renderer emits the edited or editing_canceled signal.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path_string">
+<parameter_description> a string of the path identifying the edited cell
+(relative to the tree view model)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_iter">
+<parameter_description> the new iter selected in the combo box
+(relative to the combo box model)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellRendererText::edited">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted after @renderer has been edited.
+
+It is the responsibility of the application to update the model
+and store @new_text at the position indicated by @path.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="renderer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the path identifying the edited cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_text">
+<parameter_description> the new text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCellRendererToggle::toggled">
+<description>
+The ::toggled signal is emitted when the cell is toggled.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> string representation of #GtkTreePath describing the
+event location
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCheckMenuItem::toggled">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the state of the check box is changed.
+
+A signal handler can use gtk_check_menu_item_get_active()
+to discover the new state.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="checkmenuitem">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkClipboard::owner-change">
+<description>
+The ::owner-change signal is emitted when GTK+ receives an
+event that indicates that the ownership of the selection
+associated with @clipboard has changed.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkClipboard on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the @GdkEventOwnerChange event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkColorButton::color-set">
+<description>
+The ::color-set signal is emitted when the user selects a color.
+When handling this signal, use gtk_color_button_get_color() and
+gtk_color_button_get_alpha() (or gtk_color_button_get_rgba()) to
+find out which color was just selected.
+
+Note that this signal is only emitted when the <emphasis>user</emphasis>
+changes the color. If you need to react to programmatic color changes
+as well, use the notify::color signal.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkColorSelection::color-changed">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the color changes in the #GtkColorSelection
+according to its update policy.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorselection">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkComboBox::changed">
+<description>
+The changed signal is emitted when the active
+item is changed. The can be due to the user selecting
+a different item from the list, or due to a
+call to gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter().
+It will also be emitted while typing into the entry of a combo box
+with an entry.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkComboBox::format-entry-text">
+<description>
+For combo boxes that are created with an entry (See GtkComboBox:has-entry).
+
+A signal which allows you to change how the text displayed in a combo box's
+entry is displayed.
+
+Connect a signal handler which returns an allocated string representing
+ path That string will then be used to set the text in the combo box's entry.
+The default signal handler uses the text from the GtkComboBox::entry-text-column
+model column.
+
+Here's an example signal handler which fetches data from the model and
+displays it in the entry.
+|[
+static gchar*
+format_entry_text_callback (GtkComboBox *combo,
+const gchar *path,
+gpointer user_data)
+{
+GtkTreeIter iter;
+GtkTreeModel model;
+gdouble value;
+
+model = gtk_combo_box_get_model (combo);
+
+gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (model, &iter, path);
+gtk_tree_model_get (model, &iter,
+THE_DOUBLE_VALUE_COLUMN, &value,
+-1);
+
+return g_strdup_printf ("%g", value);
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the GtkTreePath string from the combo box's current model to format text for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly allocated string representing @path
+for the current GtkComboBox model.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkComboBox::move-active">
+<description>
+The ::move-active signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to move the active selection.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scroll_type">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrollType
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkComboBox::popdown">
+<description>
+The ::popdown signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to popdown the combo box list.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are Alt+Up and Escape.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkComboBox::popup">
+<description>
+The ::popup signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to popup the combo box list.
+
+The default binding for this signal is Alt+Down.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkCssProvider::parsing-error">
+<description>
+Signals that a parsing error occured. the @path, @line and @position
+describe the actual location of the error as accurately as possible.
+
+Parsing errors are never fatal, so the parsing will resume after
+the error. Errors may however cause parts of the given
+data or even all of it to not be parsed at all. So it is a useful idea
+to check that the parsing succeeds by connecting to this signal.
+
+Note that this signal may be emitted at any time as the css provider
+may opt to defer parsing parts or all of the input to a later time
+than when a loading function was called.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="provider">
+<parameter_description> the provider that had a parsing error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> section the error happened in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> The parsing error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkDialog::close">
+<description>
+The ::close signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user uses a keybinding to close
+the dialog.
+
+The default binding for this signal is the Escape key.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkDialog::response">
+<description>
+Emitted when an action widget is clicked, the dialog receives a
+delete event, or the application programmer calls gtk_dialog_response().
+On a delete event, the response ID is #GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT.
+Otherwise, it depends on which action widget was clicked.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="response_id">
+<parameter_description> the response ID
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEditable::changed">
+<description>
+The ::changed signal is emitted at the end of a single
+user-visible operation on the contents of the #GtkEditable.
+
+E.g., a paste operation that replaces the contents of the
+selection will cause only one signal emission (even though it
+is implemented by first deleting the selection, then inserting
+the new content, and may cause multiple ::notify::text signals
+to be emitted).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEditable::delete-text">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when text is deleted from
+the widget by the user. The default handler for
+this signal will normally be responsible for deleting
+the text, so by connecting to this signal and then
+stopping the signal with g_signal_stop_emission(), it
+is possible to modify the range of deleted text, or
+prevent it from being deleted entirely. The @start_pos
+and @end_pos parameters are interpreted as for
+gtk_editable_delete_text().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_pos">
+<parameter_description> the starting position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_pos">
+<parameter_description> the end position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEditable::insert-text">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when text is inserted into
+the widget by the user. The default handler for
+this signal will normally be responsible for inserting
+the text, so by connecting to this signal and then
+stopping the signal with g_signal_stop_emission(), it
+is possible to modify the inserted text, or prevent
+it from being inserted entirely.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_text">
+<parameter_description> the new text to insert
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_text_length">
+<parameter_description> the length of the new text, in bytes,
+or -1 if new_text is nul-terminated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position, in characters,
+at which to insert the new text. this is an in-out
+parameter. After the signal emission is finished, it
+should point after the newly inserted text.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::activate">
+<description>
+A <link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user activates the entry.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control activation
+programmatically.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are all forms of the Enter key.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> The entry on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::backspace">
+<description>
+The ::backspace signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Backspace and Shift-Backspace.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::copy-clipboard">
+<description>
+The ::copy-clipboard signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to copy the selection to the clipboard.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Ctrl-c and Ctrl-Insert.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::cut-clipboard">
+<description>
+The ::cut-clipboard signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to cut the selection to the clipboard.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Ctrl-x and Shift-Delete.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::delete-from-cursor">
+<description>
+The ::delete-from-cursor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates a text deletion.
+
+If the @type is %GTK_DELETE_CHARS, GTK+ deletes the selection
+if there is one, otherwise it deletes the requested number
+of characters.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Delete for deleting a character and Ctrl-Delete for
+deleting a word.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> the granularity of the deletion, as a #GtkDeleteType
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> the number of @type units to delete
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::icon-press">
+<description>
+The ::icon-press signal is emitted when an activatable icon
+is clicked.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> The entry on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> The position of the clicked icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the button press event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::icon-release">
+<description>
+The ::icon-release signal is emitted on the button release from a
+mouse click over an activatable icon.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> The entry on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> The position of the clicked icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the button release event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::insert-at-cursor">
+<description>
+The ::insert-at-cursor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates the insertion of a
+fixed string at the cursor.
+
+This signal has no default bindings.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string to insert
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::move-cursor">
+<description>
+The ::move-cursor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
+If the cursor is not visible in @entry, this signal causes
+the viewport to be moved instead.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor
+programmatically.
+
+The default bindings for this signal come in two variants,
+the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection,
+the variant without the Shift modifer does not.
+There are too many key combinations to list them all here.
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>Arrow keys move by individual characters/lines</listitem>
+<listitem>Ctrl-arrow key combinations move by words/paragraphs</listitem>
+<listitem>Home/End keys move to the ends of the buffer</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> the granularity of the move, as a #GtkMovementStep
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> the number of @step units to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="extend_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the move should extend the selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::paste-clipboard">
+<description>
+The ::paste-clipboard signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to paste the contents of the clipboard
+into the text view.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Ctrl-v and Shift-Insert.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::populate-popup">
+<description>
+The ::populate-popup signal gets emitted before showing the
+context menu of the entry.
+
+If you need to add items to the context menu, connect
+to this signal and append your menuitems to the @menu.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> The entry on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> the menu that is being populated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::preedit-changed">
+<description>
+If an input method is used, the typed text will not immediately
+be committed to the buffer. So if you are interested in the text,
+connect to this signal.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preedit">
+<parameter_description> the current preedit string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntry::toggle-overwrite">
+<description>
+The ::toggle-overwrite signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to toggle the overwrite mode of the entry.
+
+The default bindings for this signal is Insert.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntryBuffer::deleted-text">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted after text is deleted from the buffer.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position the text was deleted at.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> The number of characters that were deleted.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntryBuffer::inserted-text">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted after text is inserted into the buffer.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position the text was inserted at.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="chars">
+<parameter_description> The text that was inserted.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> The number of characters that were inserted.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntryCompletion::action-activated">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when an action is activated.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index">
+<parameter_description> the index of the activated action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntryCompletion::cursor-on-match">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when a match from the cursor is on a match
+of the list. The default behaviour is to replace the contents
+of the entry with the contents of the text column in the row
+pointed to by @iter.
+
+Note that @model is the model that was passed to
+gtk_entry_completion_set_model().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeModel containing the matches
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeIter positioned at the selected match
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal has been handled
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntryCompletion::insert-prefix">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when the inline autocompletion is triggered.
+The default behaviour is to make the entry display the
+whole prefix and select the newly inserted part.
+
+Applications may connect to this signal in order to insert only a
+smaller part of the @prefix into the entry - e.g. the entry used in
+the #GtkFileChooser inserts only the part of the prefix up to the
+next '/'.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="prefix">
+<parameter_description> the common prefix of all possible completions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal has been handled
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkEntryCompletion::match-selected">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when a match from the list is selected.
+The default behaviour is to replace the contents of the
+entry with the contents of the text column in the row
+pointed to by @iter.
+
+Note that @model is the model that was passed to
+gtk_entry_completion_set_model().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeModel containing the matches
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeIter positioned at the selected match
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal has been handled
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite">
+<description>
+This signal gets emitted whenever it is appropriate to present a
+confirmation dialog when the user has selected a file name that
+already exists. The signal only gets emitted when the file
+chooser is in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode.
+
+Most applications just need to turn on the
+#GtkFileChooser:do-overwrite-confirmation property (or call the
+gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation() function), and
+they will automatically get a stock confirmation dialog.
+Applications which need to customize this behavior should do
+that, and also connect to the #GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite
+signal.
+
+A signal handler for this signal must return a
+#GtkFileChooserConfirmation value, which indicates the action to
+take. If the handler determines that the user wants to select a
+different filename, it should return
+%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_SELECT_AGAIN. If it determines
+that the user is satisfied with his choice of file name, it
+should return %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_ACCEPT_FILENAME.
+On the other hand, if it determines that the stock confirmation
+dialog should be used, it should return
+%GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_CONFIRM. The following example
+illustrates this.
+<example id="gtkfilechooser-confirmation">
+<title>Custom confirmation</title>
+<programlisting>
+static GtkFileChooserConfirmation
+confirm_overwrite_callback (GtkFileChooser *chooser, gpointer data)
+{
+char *uri;
+
+uri = gtk_file_chooser_get_uri (chooser);
+
+if (is_uri_read_only (uri))
+{
+if (user_wants_to_replace_read_only_file (uri))
+return GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_ACCEPT_FILENAME;
+else
+return GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_SELECT_AGAIN;
+} else
+return GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_CONFIRM; // fall back to the default dialog
+}
+
+...
+
+chooser = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new (...);
+
+gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation (GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog), TRUE);
+g_signal_connect (chooser, "confirm-overwrite",
+G_CALLBACK (confirm_overwrite_callback), NULL);
+
+if (gtk_dialog_run (chooser) == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
+save_to_file (gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (chooser));
+
+gtk_widget_destroy (chooser);
+</programlisting>
+</example>
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkFileChooserConfirmation value that indicates which
+action to take after emitting the signal.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkFileChooser::current-folder-changed">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the current folder in a #GtkFileChooser
+changes. This can happen due to the user performing some action that
+changes folders, such as selecting a bookmark or visiting a folder on the
+file list. It can also happen as a result of calling a function to
+explicitly change the current folder in a file chooser.
+
+Normally you do not need to connect to this signal, unless you need to keep
+track of which folder a file chooser is showing.
+
+See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder(),
+gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder(),
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri(),
+gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkFileChooser::file-activated">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the user "activates" a file in the file
+chooser. This can happen by double-clicking on a file in the file list, or
+by pressing <keycap>Enter</keycap>.
+
+Normally you do not need to connect to this signal. It is used internally
+by #GtkFileChooserDialog to know when to activate the default button in the
+dialog.
+
+See also: gtk_file_chooser_get_filename(),
+gtk_file_chooser_get_filenames(), gtk_file_chooser_get_uri(),
+gtk_file_chooser_get_uris().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkFileChooser::selection-changed">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when there is a change in the set of selected files
+in a #GtkFileChooser. This can happen when the user modifies the selection
+with the mouse or the keyboard, or when explicitly calling functions to
+change the selection.
+
+Normally you do not need to connect to this signal, as it is easier to wait
+for the file chooser to finish running, and then to get the list of
+selected files using the functions mentioned below.
+
+See also: gtk_file_chooser_select_filename(),
+gtk_file_chooser_unselect_filename(), gtk_file_chooser_get_filename(),
+gtk_file_chooser_get_filenames(), gtk_file_chooser_select_uri(),
+gtk_file_chooser_unselect_uri(), gtk_file_chooser_get_uri(),
+gtk_file_chooser_get_uris().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkFileChooser::update-preview">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the preview in a file chooser should be
+regenerated. For example, this can happen when the currently selected file
+changes. You should use this signal if you want your file chooser to have
+a preview widget.
+
+Once you have installed a preview widget with
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget(), you should update it when this
+signal is emitted. You can use the functions
+gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename() or
+gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri() to get the name of the file to preview.
+Your widget may not be able to preview all kinds of files; your callback
+must call gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active() to inform the file
+chooser about whether the preview was generated successfully or not.
+
+Please see the example code in <xref linkend="gtkfilechooser-preview"/>.
+
+See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget(),
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active(),
+gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label(),
+gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename(),
+gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkFileChooserButton::file-set">
+<description>
+The ::file-set signal is emitted when the user selects a file.
+
+Note that this signal is only emitted when the <emphasis>user</emphasis>
+changes the file.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkFontButton::font-set">
+<description>
+The ::font-set signal is emitted when the user selects a font.
+When handling this signal, use gtk_font_button_get_font_name()
+to find out which font was just selected.
+
+Note that this signal is only emitted when the <emphasis>user</emphasis>
+changes the font. If you need to react to programmatic font changes
+as well, use the notify::font-name signal.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkFontChooserWidget::font-activated">
+<description>
+Emitted when a font is activated from the widget's list.
+This usually happens when the user double clicks an item,
+or an item is selected and the user presses one of the keys
+Space, Shift+Space, Return or Enter.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fontname">
+<parameter_description> the font name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkHandleBox::child-attached">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the contents of the
+handlebox are reattached to the main window.
+
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="handlebox">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the child widget of the handlebox.
+(this argument provides no extra information
+and is here only for backwards-compatibility)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkHandleBox::child-detached">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the contents of the
+handlebox are detached from the main window.
+
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="handlebox">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the child widget of the handlebox.
+(this argument provides no extra information
+and is here only for backwards-compatibility)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIMContext::commit">
+<description>
+The ::commit signal is emitted when a complete input sequence
+has been entered by the user. This can be a single character
+immediately after a key press or the final result of preediting.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> the completed character(s) entered by the user
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIMContext::delete-surrounding">
+<description>
+The ::delete-surrounding signal is emitted when the input method
+needs to delete all or part of the context surrounding the cursor.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offset">
+<parameter_description> the character offset from the cursor position of the text
+to be deleted. A negative value indicates a position before
+the cursor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> the number of characters to be deleted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal was handled.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIMContext::preedit-changed">
+<description>
+The ::preedit-changed signal is emitted whenever the preedit sequence
+currently being entered has changed. It is also emitted at the end of
+a preedit sequence, in which case
+gtk_im_context_get_preedit_string() returns the empty string.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIMContext::preedit-end">
+<description>
+The ::preedit-end signal is emitted when a preediting sequence
+has been completed or canceled.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIMContext::preedit-start">
+<description>
+The ::preedit-start signal is emitted when a new preediting sequence
+starts.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding">
+<description>
+The ::retrieve-surrounding signal is emitted when the input method
+requires the context surrounding the cursor. The callback should set
+the input method surrounding context by calling the
+gtk_im_context_set_surrounding() method.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal was handled.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIconTheme::changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the current icon theme is switched or GTK+ detects
+that a change has occurred in the contents of the current
+icon theme.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> the icon theme
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIconView::activate-cursor-item">
+<description>
+A <link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user activates the currently
+focused item.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control activation
+programmatically.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are Space, Return and Enter.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iconview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIconView::item-activated">
+<description>
+The ::item-activated signal is emitted when the method
+gtk_icon_view_item_activated() is called or the user double
+clicks an item. It is also emitted when a non-editable item
+is selected and one of the keys: Space, Return or Enter is
+pressed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iconview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreePath for the activated item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIconView::move-cursor">
+<description>
+The ::move-cursor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor
+programmatically.
+
+The default bindings for this signal include
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>Arrow keys which move by individual steps</listitem>
+<listitem>Home/End keys which move to the first/last item</listitem>
+<listitem>PageUp/PageDown which move by "pages"</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+All of these will extend the selection when combined with
+the Shift modifier.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iconview">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> the granularity of the move, as a #GtkMovementStep
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> the number of @step units to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIconView::select-all">
+<description>
+A <link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user selects all items.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control selection
+programmatically.
+
+The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-a.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iconview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIconView::select-cursor-item">
+<description>
+A <link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user selects the item that is currently
+focused.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control selection
+programmatically.
+
+There is no default binding for this signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iconview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIconView::selection-changed">
+<description>
+The ::selection-changed signal is emitted when the selection
+(i.e. the set of selected items) changes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iconview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIconView::toggle-cursor-item">
+<description>
+A <link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user toggles whether the currently
+focused item is selected or not. The exact effect of this
+depend on the selection mode.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control selection
+programmatically.
+
+There is no default binding for this signal is Ctrl-Space.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iconview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkIconView::unselect-all">
+<description>
+A <link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user unselects all items.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control selection
+programmatically.
+
+The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-Shift-a.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iconview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkInfoBar::close">
+<description>
+The ::close signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user uses a keybinding to dismiss
+the info bar.
+
+The default binding for this signal is the Escape key.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkInfoBar::response">
+<description>
+Emitted when an action widget is clicked or the application programmer
+calls gtk_dialog_response(). The @response_id depends on which action
+widget was clicked.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="info_bar">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="response_id">
+<parameter_description> the response ID
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkLabel::activate-current-link">
+<description>
+A <link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user activates a link in the label.
+
+Applications may also emit the signal with g_signal_emit_by_name()
+if they need to control activation of URIs programmatically.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are all forms of the Enter key.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The label on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkLabel::activate-link">
+<description>
+The signal which gets emitted to activate a URI.
+Applications may connect to it to override the default behaviour,
+which is to call gtk_show_uri().
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The label on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI that is activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the link has been activated
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkLabel::copy-clipboard">
+<description>
+The ::copy-clipboard signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to copy the selection to the clipboard.
+
+The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-c.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkLabel::move-cursor">
+<description>
+The ::move-cursor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
+If the cursor is not visible in @entry, this signal causes
+the viewport to be moved instead.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor
+programmatically.
+
+The default bindings for this signal come in two variants,
+the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection,
+the variant without the Shift modifer does not.
+There are too many key combinations to list them all here.
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>Arrow keys move by individual characters/lines</listitem>
+<listitem>Ctrl-arrow key combinations move by words/paragraphs</listitem>
+<listitem>Home/End keys move to the ends of the buffer</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> the granularity of the move, as a #GtkMovementStep
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> the number of @step units to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="extend_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the move should extend the selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkLabel::populate-popup">
+<description>
+The ::populate-popup signal gets emitted before showing the
+context menu of the label. Note that only selectable labels
+have context menus.
+
+If you need to add items to the context menu, connect
+to this signal and append your menuitems to the @menu.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The label on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> the menu that is being populated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkLinkButton::activate-link">
+<description>
+The ::activate-link signal is emitted each time the #GtkLinkButton
+has been clicked.
+
+The default handler will call gtk_show_uri() with the URI stored inside
+the #GtkLinkButton:uri property.
+
+To override the default behavior, you can connect to the ::activate-link
+signal and stop the propagation of the signal by returning %TRUE from
+your handler.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkLinkButton that emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenu::move-scroll">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scroll_type">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrollType
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuItem::activate">
+<description>
+Emitted when the item is activated.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menuitem">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuItem::activate-item">
+<description>
+Emitted when the item is activated, but also if the menu item has a
+submenu. For normal applications, the relevant signal is
+#GtkMenuItem::activate.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menuitem">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuShell::activate-current">
+<description>
+An action signal that activates the current menu item within
+the menu shell.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menushell">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="force_hide">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, hide the menu after activating the menu item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuShell::cancel">
+<description>
+An action signal which cancels the selection within the menu shell.
+Causes the #GtkMenuShell::selection-done signal to be emitted.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menushell">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuShell::cycle-focus">
+<description>
+A keybinding signal which moves the focus in the
+given @direction.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menushell">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> the direction to cycle in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuShell::deactivate">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when a menu shell is deactivated.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menushell">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuShell::insert">
+<description>
+The ::insert signal is emitted when a new #GtkMenuItem is added to
+a #GtkMenuShell. A separate signal is used instead of
+GtkContainer::add because of the need for an additional position
+parameter.
+
+The inverse of this signal is the GtkContainer::removed signal.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu_shell">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkMenuItem that is being inserted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position at which the insert occurs
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuShell::move-current">
+<description>
+An keybinding signal which moves the current menu item
+in the direction specified by @direction.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menushell">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> the direction to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuShell::move-selected">
+<description>
+The ::move-selected signal is emitted to move the selection to
+another item.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu_shell">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="distance">
+<parameter_description> +1 to move to the next item, -1 to move to the previous
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop the signal emission, %FALSE to continue
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuShell::selection-done">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when a selection has been
+completed within a menu shell.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menushell">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkMenuToolButton::show-menu">
+<description>
+The ::show-menu signal is emitted before the menu is shown.
+
+It can be used to populate the menu on demand, using
+gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu().
+
+Note that even if you populate the menu dynamically in this way,
+you must set an empty menu on the #GtkMenuToolButton beforehand,
+since the arrow is made insensitive if the menu is not set.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkNotebook::create-window">
+<description>
+The ::create-window signal is emitted when a detachable
+tab is dropped on the root window.
+
+A handler for this signal can create a window containing
+a notebook where the tab will be attached. It is also
+responsible for moving/resizing the window and adding the
+necessary properties to the notebook (e.g. the
+#GtkNotebook:group ).
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebook emitting the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> the tab of @notebook that is being detached
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the X coordinate where the drop happens
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the Y coordinate where the drop happens
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkNotebook that @page should be
+added to, or %NULL.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkNotebook::page-added">
+<description>
+the ::page-added signal is emitted in the notebook
+right after a page is added to the notebook.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child #GtkWidget affected
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> the new page number for @child
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkNotebook::page-removed">
+<description>
+the ::page-removed signal is emitted in the notebook
+right after a page is removed from the notebook.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child #GtkWidget affected
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> the @child page number
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkNotebook::page-reordered">
+<description>
+the ::page-reordered signal is emitted in the notebook
+right after a page has been reordered.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child #GtkWidget affected
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> the new page number for @child
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkNotebook::switch-page">
+<description>
+Emitted when the user or a function changes the current page.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> the new current page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> the index of the page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkOverlay::get-child-position">
+<description>
+The ::get-child-position signal is emitted to determine
+the position and size of any overlay child widgets. A
+handler for this signal should fill @allocation with
+the desired position and size for @widget, relative to
+the 'main' child of @overlay.
+
+The default handler for this signal uses the @widget's
+halign and valign properties to determine the position
+and gives the widget its natural size (except that an
+alignment of %GTK_ALIGN_FILL will cause the overlay to
+be full-width/height). If the main child is a
+#GtkScrolledWindow, the overlays are placed relative
+to its contents.
+
+Return: %TRUE if the @allocation has been filled
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="overlay">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkOverlay
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the child widget to position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="allocation">
+<parameter_description> return location for the allocation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPaned::accept-position">
+<description>
+The ::accept-position signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to accept the current position of the handle when
+moving it using key bindings.
+
+The default binding for this signal is Return or Space.
+
+Since: 2.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPaned::cancel-position">
+<description>
+The ::cancel-position signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to cancel moving the position of the handle using key
+bindings. The position of the handle will be reset to the value prior to
+moving it.
+
+The default binding for this signal is Escape.
+
+Since: 2.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPaned::cycle-child-focus">
+<description>
+The ::cycle-child-focus signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to cycle the focus between the children of the paned.
+
+The default binding is f6.
+
+Since: 2.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reversed">
+<parameter_description> whether cycling backward or forward
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPaned::cycle-handle-focus">
+<description>
+The ::cycle-handle-focus signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to cycle whether the paned should grab focus to allow
+the user to change position of the handle by using key bindings.
+
+The default binding for this signal is f8.
+
+Since: 2.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reversed">
+<parameter_description> whether cycling backward or forward
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPaned::move-handle">
+<description>
+The ::move-handle signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to move the handle when the user is using key bindings
+to move it.
+
+Since: 2.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scroll_type">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrollType
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPaned::toggle-handle-focus">
+<description>
+The ::toggle-handle-focus is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to accept the current position of the handle and then
+move focus to the next widget in the focus chain.
+
+The default binding is Tab.
+
+Since: 2.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPlug::embedded">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when the plug becomes embedded in a socket.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintJob::status-changed">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when the status of a job changes. The signal handler
+can use gtk_print_job_get_status() to obtain the new status.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintJob object on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::begin-print">
+<description>
+Emitted after the user has finished changing print settings
+in the dialog, before the actual rendering starts.
+
+A typical use for ::begin-print is to use the parameters from the
+#GtkPrintContext and paginate the document accordingly, and then
+set the number of pages with gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintContext for the current operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::create-custom-widget">
+<description>
+Emitted when displaying the print dialog. If you return a
+widget in a handler for this signal it will be added to a custom
+tab in the print dialog. You typically return a container widget
+with multiple widgets in it.
+
+The print dialog owns the returned widget, and its lifetime is not
+controlled by the application. However, the widget is guaranteed
+to stay around until the #GtkPrintOperation::custom-widget-apply
+signal is emitted on the operation. Then you can read out any
+information you need from the widgets.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A custom widget that gets embedded in
+the print dialog, or %NULL
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::custom-widget-apply">
+<description>
+Emitted right before #GtkPrintOperation::begin-print if you added
+a custom widget in the #GtkPrintOperation::create-custom-widget handler.
+When you get this signal you should read the information from the
+custom widgets, as the widgets are not guaraneed to be around at a
+later time.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the custom widget added in create-custom-widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::done">
+<description>
+Emitted when the print operation run has finished doing
+everything required for printing.
+
+ result gives you information about what happened during the run.
+If @result is %GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR then you can call
+gtk_print_operation_get_error() for more information.
+
+If you enabled print status tracking then
+gtk_print_operation_is_finished() may still return %FALSE
+after #GtkPrintOperation::done was emitted.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="result">
+<parameter_description> the result of the print operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::draw-page">
+<description>
+Emitted for every page that is printed. The signal handler
+must render the @page_nr's page onto the cairo context obtained
+from @context using gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context().
+|[
+static void
+draw_page (GtkPrintOperation *operation,
+GtkPrintContext *context,
+gint page_nr,
+gpointer user_data)
+{
+cairo_t *cr;
+PangoLayout *layout;
+gdouble width, text_height;
+gint layout_height;
+PangoFontDescription *desc;
+
+cr = gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context (context);
+width = gtk_print_context_get_width (context);
+
+cairo_rectangle (cr, 0, 0, width, HEADER_HEIGHT);
+
+cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0.8, 0.8, 0.8);
+cairo_fill (cr);
+
+layout = gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout (context);
+
+desc = pango_font_description_from_string ("sans 14");
+pango_layout_set_font_description (layout, desc);
+pango_font_description_free (desc);
+
+pango_layout_set_text (layout, "some text", -1);
+pango_layout_set_width (layout, width * PANGO_SCALE);
+pango_layout_set_alignment (layout, PANGO_ALIGN_CENTER);
+
+pango_layout_get_size (layout, NULL, &layout_height);
+text_height = (gdouble)layout_height / PANGO_SCALE;
+
+cairo_move_to (cr, width / 2, (HEADER_HEIGHT - text_height) / 2);
+pango_cairo_show_layout (cr, layout);
+
+g_object_unref (layout);
+}
+]|
+
+Use gtk_print_operation_set_use_full_page() and
+gtk_print_operation_set_unit() before starting the print operation
+to set up the transformation of the cairo context according to your
+needs.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintContext for the current operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_nr">
+<parameter_description> the number of the currently printed page (0-based)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::end-print">
+<description>
+Emitted after all pages have been rendered.
+A handler for this signal can clean up any resources that have
+been allocated in the #GtkPrintOperation::begin-print handler.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintContext for the current operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::paginate">
+<description>
+Emitted after the #GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal, but before
+the actual rendering starts. It keeps getting emitted until a connected
+signal handler returns %TRUE.
+
+The ::paginate signal is intended to be used for paginating a document
+in small chunks, to avoid blocking the user interface for a long
+time. The signal handler should update the number of pages using
+gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages(), and return %TRUE if the document
+has been completely paginated.
+
+If you don't need to do pagination in chunks, you can simply do
+it all in the ::begin-print handler, and set the number of pages
+from there.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintContext for the current operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if pagination is complete
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::preview">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when a preview is requested from the native dialog.
+
+The default handler for this signal uses an external viewer
+application to preview.
+
+To implement a custom print preview, an application must return
+%TRUE from its handler for this signal. In order to use the
+provided @context for the preview implementation, it must be
+given a suitable cairo context with gtk_print_context_set_cairo_context().
+
+The custom preview implementation can use
+gtk_print_operation_preview_is_selected() and
+gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page() to find pages which
+are selected for print and render them. The preview must be
+finished by calling gtk_print_operation_preview_end_preview()
+(typically in response to the user clicking a close button).
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preview">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintPreviewOperation for the current operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintContext that will be used
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWindow to use as window parent, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the listener wants to take over control of the preview
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup">
+<description>
+Emitted once for every page that is printed, to give
+the application a chance to modify the page setup. Any changes
+done to @setup will be in force only for printing this page.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintContext for the current operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_nr">
+<parameter_description> the number of the currently printed page (0-based)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::status-changed">
+<description>
+Emitted at between the various phases of the print operation.
+See #GtkPrintStatus for the phases that are being discriminated.
+Use gtk_print_operation_get_status() to find out the current
+status.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperation::update-custom-widget">
+<description>
+Emitted after change of selected printer. The actual page setup and
+print settings are passed to the custom widget, which can actualize
+itself according to this change.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="operation">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrintOperation on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the custom widget added in create-custom-widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> actual page setup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> actual print settings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperationPreview::got-page-size">
+<description>
+The ::got-page-size signal is emitted once for each page
+that gets rendered to the preview.
+
+A handler for this signal should update the @context
+according to @page_setup and set up a suitable cairo
+context, using gtk_print_context_set_cairo_context().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="preview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the current #GtkPrintContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_setup">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPageSetup for the current page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrintOperationPreview::ready">
+<description>
+The ::ready signal gets emitted once per preview operation,
+before the first page is rendered.
+
+A handler for this signal can be used for setup tasks.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="preview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the current #GtkPrintContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkPrinter::details-acquired">
+<description>
+Gets emitted in response to a request for detailed information
+about a printer from the print backend. The @success parameter
+indicates if the information was actually obtained.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPrinter on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="success">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the details were successfully acquired
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkRadioAction::changed">
+<description>
+The ::changed signal is emitted on every member of a radio group when the
+active member is changed. The signal gets emitted after the ::activate signals
+for the previous and current active members.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="current">
+<parameter_description> the member of @action<!-- -->s group which has just been activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkRadioButton::group-changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the group of radio buttons that a radio button belongs
+to changes. This is emitted when a radio button switches from
+being alone to being part of a group of 2 or more buttons, or
+vice-versa, and when a button is moved from one group of 2 or
+more buttons to a different one, but not when the composition
+of the group that a button belongs to changes.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkRange::adjust-bounds">
+<description>
+Emitted before clamping a value, to give the application a
+chance to adjust the bounds.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkRange that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value before we clamp
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkRange::change-value">
+<description>
+The #GtkRange::change-value signal is emitted when a scroll action is
+performed on a range. It allows an application to determine the
+type of scroll event that occurred and the resultant new value.
+The application can handle the event itself and return %TRUE to
+prevent further processing. Or, by returning %FALSE, it can pass
+the event to other handlers until the default GTK+ handler is
+reached.
+
+The value parameter is unrounded. An application that overrides
+the GtkRange::change-value signal is responsible for clamping the
+value to the desired number of decimal digits; the default GTK+
+handler clamps the value based on #GtkRange:round-digits.
+
+It is not possible to use delayed update policies in an overridden
+#GtkRange::change-value handler.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkRange that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scroll">
+<parameter_description> the type of scroll action that was performed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the new value resulting from the scroll action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to prevent other handlers from being invoked for
+the signal, %FALSE to propagate the signal further
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkRange::move-slider">
+<description>
+Virtual function that moves the slider. Used for keybindings.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkRange that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> how to move the slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkRange::value-changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the range value changes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkRange that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkRecentChooser::item-activated">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the user "activates" a recent item
+in the recent chooser. This can happen by double-clicking on an item
+in the recently used resources list, or by pressing
+<keycap>Enter</keycap>.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkRecentChooser::selection-changed">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when there is a change in the set of
+selected recently used resources. This can happen when a user
+modifies the selection with the mouse or the keyboard, or when
+explicitely calling functions to change the selection.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkRecentManager::changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the current recently used resources manager changes its
+contents, either by calling gtk_recent_manager_add_item() or by another
+application.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="recent_manager">
+<parameter_description> the recent manager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkScale::format-value">
+<description>
+Signal which allows you to change how the scale value is displayed.
+Connect a signal handler which returns an allocated string representing
+ value That string will then be used to display the scale's value.
+
+Here's an example signal handler which displays a value 1.0 as
+with "-->1.0<--".
+|[
+static gchar*
+format_value_callback (GtkScale *scale,
+gdouble value)
+{
+return g_strdup_printf ("-->%0.*g<--",
+gtk_scale_get_digits (scale), value);
+}
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value to format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> allocated string representing @value
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkScaleButton::popdown">
+<description>
+The ::popdown signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to popdown the scale widget.
+
+The default binding for this signal is Escape.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkScaleButton::popup">
+<description>
+The ::popup signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to popup the scale widget.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are Space, Enter and Return.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkScaleButton::value-changed">
+<description>
+The ::value-changed signal is emitted when the value field has
+changed.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the new value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkScrolledWindow::move-focus-out">
+<description>
+The ::move-focus-out signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when focus is moved away from the scrolled
+window by a keybinding.
+The #GtkWidget::move-focus signal is emitted with @direction_type
+on this scrolled windows toplevel parent in the container hierarchy.
+The default bindings for this signal are
+<keycombo><keycap>Tab</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap></keycombo>
+and
+<keycombo><keycap>Tab</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Shift</keycap></keycombo>.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction_type">
+<parameter_description> either %GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD or
+%GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkScrolledWindow::scroll-child">
+<description>
+The ::scroll-child signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when a keybinding that scrolls is pressed.
+The horizontal or vertical adjustment is updated which triggers a
+signal that the scrolled windows child may listen to and scroll itself.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scroll">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrollType describing how much to scroll
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="horizontal">
+<parameter_description> whether the keybinding scrolls the child
+horizontally or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkSettings::gtk-button-images">
+<description>
+Whether images should be shown on buttons
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkSocket::plug-added">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when a client is successfully
+added to the socket.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkSocket::plug-removed">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when a client is removed from the socket.
+The default action is to destroy the #GtkSocket widget, so if you
+want to reuse it you must add a signal handler that returns %TRUE.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkSpinButton::input">
+<description>
+The ::input signal can be used to influence the conversion of
+the users input into a double value. The signal handler is
+expected to use gtk_entry_get_text() to retrieve the text of
+the entry and set @new_value to the new value.
+
+The default conversion uses g_strtod().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal was emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_value">
+<parameter_description> return location for the new value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE for a successful conversion, %FALSE if the input
+was not handled, and %GTK_INPUT_ERROR if the conversion failed.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkSpinButton::output">
+<description>
+The ::output signal can be used to change to formatting
+of the value that is displayed in the spin buttons entry.
+|[
+/ * show leading zeros * /
+static gboolean
+on_output (GtkSpinButton *spin,
+gpointer data)
+{
+GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
+gchar *text;
+int value;
+
+adjustment = gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment (spin);
+value = (int)gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
+text = g_strdup_printf ("%02d", value);
+gtk_entry_set_text (GTK_ENTRY (spin), text);
+g_free (text);
+
+return TRUE;
+}
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the value has been displayed
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkSpinButton::wrapped">
+<description>
+The wrapped signal is emitted right after the spinbutton wraps
+from its maximum to minimum value or vice-versa.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="spinbutton">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStatusIcon::activate">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when the user activates the status icon.
+If and how status icons can activated is platform-dependent.
+
+Unlike most G_SIGNAL_ACTION signals, this signal is meant to
+be used by applications and should be wrapped by language bindings.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStatusIcon::button-press-event">
+<description>
+The ::button-press-event signal will be emitted when a button
+(typically from a mouse) is pressed.
+
+Whether this event is emitted is platform-dependent. Use the ::activate
+and ::popup-menu signals in preference.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventButton which triggered
+this signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked
+for the event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStatusIcon::button-release-event">
+<description>
+The ::button-release-event signal will be emitted when a button
+(typically from a mouse) is released.
+
+Whether this event is emitted is platform-dependent. Use the ::activate
+and ::popup-menu signals in preference.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventButton which triggered
+this signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked
+for the event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStatusIcon::popup-menu">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when the user brings up the context menu
+of the status icon. Whether status icons can have context
+menus and how these are activated is platform-dependent.
+
+The @button and @activate_time parameters should be
+passed as the last to arguments to gtk_menu_popup().
+
+Unlike most G_SIGNAL_ACTION signals, this signal is meant to
+be used by applications and should be wrapped by language bindings.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button that was pressed, or 0 if the
+signal is not emitted in response to a button press event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="activate_time">
+<parameter_description> the timestamp of the event that
+triggered the signal emission
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip">
+<description>
+Emitted when the #GtkSettings:gtk-tooltip-timeout has expired with the
+cursor hovering above @status_icon; or emitted when @status_icon got
+focus in keyboard mode.
+
+Using the given coordinates, the signal handler should determine
+whether a tooltip should be shown for @status_icon. If this is
+the case %TRUE should be returned, %FALSE otherwise. Note that if
+ keyboard_mode is %TRUE, the values of @x and @y are undefined and
+should not be used.
+
+The signal handler is free to manipulate @tooltip with the therefore
+destined function calls.
+
+Whether this signal is emitted is platform-dependent.
+For plain text tooltips, use #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-text in preference.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the cursor position where the request has been
+emitted, relative to @status_icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the cursor position where the request has been
+emitted, relative to @status_icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyboard_mode">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tooltip was trigged using the keyboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @tooltip should be shown right now, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStatusIcon::scroll-event">
+<description>
+The ::scroll-event signal is emitted when a button in the 4 to 7
+range is pressed. Wheel mice are usually configured to generate
+button press events for buttons 4 and 5 when the wheel is turned.
+
+Whether this event is emitted is platform-dependent.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventScroll which triggered
+this signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStatusIcon::size-changed">
+<description>
+Gets emitted when the size available for the image
+changes, e.g. because the notification area got resized.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the new size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the icon was updated for the new
+size. Otherwise, GTK+ will scale the icon as necessary.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStatusbar::text-popped">
+<description>
+Is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the context id of the relevant message/statusbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the message that was just popped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStatusbar::text-pushed">
+<description>
+Is emitted whenever a new message gets pushed onto a statusbar's stack.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the context id of the relevant message/statusbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the message that was pushed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStyle::group-changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the group of radio menu items that a radio menu item belongs
+to changes. This is emitted when a radio menu item switches from
+being alone to being part of a group of 2 or more menu items, or
+vice-versa, and when a button is moved from one group of 2 or
+more menu items ton a different one, but not when the composition
+of the group that a menu item belongs to changes.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStyle::realize">
+<description>
+Emitted when the style has been initialized for a particular
+visual. Connecting to this signal is probably seldom
+useful since most of the time applications and widgets only
+deal with styles that have been already realized.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkStyle::unrealize">
+<description>
+Emitted when the aspects of the style specific to a particular visual
+is being cleaned up. A connection to this signal can be useful
+if a widget wants to cache objects as object data on #GtkStyle.
+This signal provides a convenient place to free such cached objects.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkSwitch::activate">
+<description>
+The ::activate signal on GtkSwitch is an action signal and
+emitting it causes the switch to animate.
+Applications should never connect to this signal, but use the
+notify::active signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::apply-tag">
+<description>
+The ::apply-tag signal is emitted to apply a tag to a
+range of text in a #GtkTextBuffer.
+Applying actually occurs in the default handler.
+
+Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
+invalidate the @start and @end iters (or has to revalidate them).
+
+See also:
+gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag(),
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags(),
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_range().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> the applied tag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> the start of the range the tag is applied to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> the end of the range the tag is applied to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::begin-user-action">
+<description>
+The ::begin-user-action signal is emitted at the beginning of a single
+user-visible operation on a #GtkTextBuffer.
+
+See also:
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action(),
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(),
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_range_interactive(),
+gtk_text_buffer_delete_interactive(),
+gtk_text_buffer_backspace(),
+gtk_text_buffer_delete_selection().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::changed">
+<description>
+The ::changed signal is emitted when the content of a #GtkTextBuffer
+has changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::delete-range">
+<description>
+The ::delete-range signal is emitted to delete a range
+from a #GtkTextBuffer.
+
+Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
+invalidate the @start and @end iters (or has to revalidate them).
+The default signal handler revalidates the @start and @end iters to
+both point point to the location where text was deleted. Handlers
+which run after the default handler (see g_signal_connect_after())
+do not have access to the deleted text.
+
+See also: gtk_text_buffer_delete().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> the start of the range to be deleted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> the end of the range to be deleted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::end-user-action">
+<description>
+The ::end-user-action signal is emitted at the end of a single
+user-visible operation on the #GtkTextBuffer.
+
+See also:
+gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(),
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(),
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_range_interactive(),
+gtk_text_buffer_delete_interactive(),
+gtk_text_buffer_backspace(),
+gtk_text_buffer_delete_selection(),
+gtk_text_buffer_backspace().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::insert-child-anchor">
+<description>
+The ::insert-child-anchor signal is emitted to insert a
+#GtkTextChildAnchor in a #GtkTextBuffer.
+Insertion actually occurs in the default handler.
+
+Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must
+not invalidate the @location iter (or has to revalidate it).
+The default signal handler revalidates it to be placed after the
+inserted @anchor.
+
+See also: gtk_text_buffer_insert_child_anchor().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> position to insert @anchor in @textbuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTextChildAnchor to be inserted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::insert-pixbuf">
+<description>
+The ::insert-pixbuf signal is emitted to insert a #GdkPixbuf
+in a #GtkTextBuffer. Insertion actually occurs in the default handler.
+
+Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
+invalidate the @location iter (or has to revalidate it).
+The default signal handler revalidates it to be placed after the
+inserted @pixbuf.
+
+See also: gtk_text_buffer_insert_pixbuf().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> position to insert @pixbuf in @textbuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbuf to be inserted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::insert-text">
+<description>
+The ::insert-text signal is emitted to insert text in a #GtkTextBuffer.
+Insertion actually occurs in the default handler.
+
+Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
+invalidate the @location iter (or has to revalidate it).
+The default signal handler revalidates it to point to the end of the
+inserted text.
+
+See also:
+gtk_text_buffer_insert(),
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_range().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> position to insert @text in @textbuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the UTF-8 text to be inserted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> length of the inserted text in bytes
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::mark-deleted">
+<description>
+The ::mark-deleted signal is emitted as notification
+after a #GtkTextMark is deleted.
+
+See also:
+gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> The mark that was deleted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::mark-set">
+<description>
+The ::mark-set signal is emitted as notification
+after a #GtkTextMark is set.
+
+See also:
+gtk_text_buffer_create_mark(),
+gtk_text_buffer_move_mark().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> The location of @mark in @textbuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> The mark that is set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::modified-changed">
+<description>
+The ::modified-changed signal is emitted when the modified bit of a
+#GtkTextBuffer flips.
+
+See also:
+gtk_text_buffer_set_modified().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::paste-done">
+<description>
+The paste-done signal is emitted after paste operation has been completed.
+This is useful to properly scroll the view to the end of the pasted text.
+See gtk_text_buffer_paste_clipboard() for more details.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextBuffer::remove-tag">
+<description>
+The ::remove-tag signal is emitted to remove all occurrences of @tag from
+a range of text in a #GtkTextBuffer.
+Removal actually occurs in the default handler.
+
+Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
+invalidate the @start and @end iters (or has to revalidate them).
+
+See also:
+gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="textbuffer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> the tag to be removed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> the start of the range the tag is removed from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> the end of the range the tag is removed from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextTag::event">
+<description>
+The ::event signal is emitted when an event occurs on a region of the
+buffer marked with this tag.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTextTag on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the object the event was fired from (typically a #GtkTextView)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the event which triggered the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter pointing at the location the event occured
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the
+event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextTagTable::tag-added">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="texttagtable">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> the added tag.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextTagTable::tag-changed">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="texttagtable">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> the changed tag.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size_changed">
+<parameter_description> whether the size has been changed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextTagTable::tag-removed">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="texttagtable">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> the removed tag.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::backspace">
+<description>
+The ::backspace signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Backspace and Shift-Backspace.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::copy-clipboard">
+<description>
+The ::copy-clipboard signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to copy the selection to the clipboard.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Ctrl-c and Ctrl-Insert.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::cut-clipboard">
+<description>
+The ::cut-clipboard signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to cut the selection to the clipboard.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Ctrl-x and Shift-Delete.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::delete-from-cursor">
+<description>
+The ::delete-from-cursor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates a text deletion.
+
+If the @type is %GTK_DELETE_CHARS, GTK+ deletes the selection
+if there is one, otherwise it deletes the requested number
+of characters.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Delete for deleting a character, Ctrl-Delete for
+deleting a word and Ctrl-Backspace for deleting a word
+backwords.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> the granularity of the deletion, as a #GtkDeleteType
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> the number of @type units to delete
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::insert-at-cursor">
+<description>
+The ::insert-at-cursor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates the insertion of a
+fixed string at the cursor.
+
+This signal has no default bindings.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string to insert
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::move-cursor">
+<description>
+The ::move-cursor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
+If the cursor is not visible in @text_view, this signal causes
+the viewport to be moved instead.
+
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor
+programmatically.
+
+The default bindings for this signal come in two variants,
+the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection,
+the variant without the Shift modifer does not.
+There are too many key combinations to list them all here.
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>Arrow keys move by individual characters/lines</listitem>
+<listitem>Ctrl-arrow key combinations move by words/paragraphs</listitem>
+<listitem>Home/End keys move to the ends of the buffer</listitem>
+<listitem>PageUp/PageDown keys move vertically by pages</listitem>
+<listitem>Ctrl-PageUp/PageDown keys move horizontally by pages</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> the granularity of the move, as a #GtkMovementStep
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> the number of @step units to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="extend_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the move should extend the selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::move-viewport">
+<description>
+The ::move-viewport signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which can be bound to key combinations to allow the user
+to move the viewport, i.e. change what part of the text view
+is visible in a containing scrolled window.
+
+There are no default bindings for this signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> the granularity of the move, as a #GtkMovementStep
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> the number of @step units to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::paste-clipboard">
+<description>
+The ::paste-clipboard signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to paste the contents of the clipboard
+into the text view.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are
+Ctrl-v and Shift-Insert.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::populate-popup">
+<description>
+The ::populate-popup signal gets emitted before showing the
+context menu of the text view.
+
+If you need to add items to the context menu, connect
+to this signal and append your menuitems to the @menu.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> The text view on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> the menu that is being populated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::preedit-changed">
+<description>
+If an input method is used, the typed text will not immediately
+be committed to the buffer. So if you are interested in the text,
+connect to this signal.
+
+This signal is only emitted if the text at the given position
+is actually editable.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preedit">
+<parameter_description> the current preedit string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::select-all">
+<description>
+The ::select-all signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to select or unselect the complete
+contents of the text view.
+
+The default bindings for this signal are Ctrl-a and Ctrl-/
+for selecting and Shift-Ctrl-a and Ctrl-\ for unselecting.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="select">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to select, %FALSE to unselect
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::set-anchor">
+<description>
+The ::set-anchor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates setting the "anchor"
+mark. The "anchor" mark gets placed at the same position as the
+"insert" mark.
+
+This signal has no default bindings.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::toggle-cursor-visible">
+<description>
+The ::toggle-cursor-visible signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to toggle the visibility of the cursor.
+
+The default binding for this signal is F7.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTextView::toggle-overwrite">
+<description>
+The ::toggle-overwrite signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted to toggle the overwrite mode of the text view.
+
+The default bindings for this signal is Insert.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToggleAction::toggled">
+<description>
+Should be connected if you wish to perform an action
+whenever the #GtkToggleAction state is changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toggleaction">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToggleButton::toggled">
+<description>
+Should be connected if you wish to perform an action whenever the
+#GtkToggleButton's state is changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="togglebutton">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToggleToolButton::toggled">
+<description>
+Emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toggle_tool_button">
+<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToolButton::clicked">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the tool button is clicked with the mouse
+or activated with the keyboard.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbutton">
+<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToolItem::create-menu-proxy">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the toolbar needs information from @tool_item
+about whether the item should appear in the toolbar overflow menu. In
+response the tool item should either
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>call gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item() with a %NULL
+pointer and return %TRUE to indicate that the item should not appear
+in the overflow menu
+</listitem>
+<listitem> call gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item() with a new menu
+item and return %TRUE, or
+</listitem>
+<listitem> return %FALSE to indicate that the signal was not
+handled by the item. This means that
+the item will not appear in the overflow menu unless a later handler
+installs a menu item.
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+The toolbar may cache the result of this signal. When the tool item changes
+how it will respond to this signal it must call gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu()
+to invalidate the cache and ensure that the toolbar rebuilds its overflow
+menu.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> the object the signal was emitted on
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToolItem::toolbar-reconfigured">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when some property of the toolbar that the
+item is a child of changes. For custom subclasses of #GtkToolItem,
+the default handler of this signal use the functions
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>gtk_tool_shell_get_orientation()</listitem>
+<listitem>gtk_tool_shell_get_style()</listitem>
+<listitem>gtk_tool_shell_get_icon_size()</listitem>
+<listitem>gtk_tool_shell_get_relief_style()</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+to find out what the toolbar should look like and change
+themselves accordingly.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> the object the signal was emitted on
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToolbar::focus-home-or-end">
+<description>
+A keybinding signal used internally by GTK+. This signal can't
+be used in application code
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolbar which emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focus_home">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the first item should be focused
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToolbar::orientation-changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the orientation of the toolbar changes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> the object which emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the new #GtkOrientation of the toolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToolbar::popup-context-menu">
+<description>
+Emitted when the user right-clicks the toolbar or uses the
+keybinding to display a popup menu.
+
+Application developers should handle this signal if they want
+to display a context menu on the toolbar. The context-menu should
+appear at the coordinates given by @x and @y. The mouse button
+number is given by the @button parameter. If the menu was popped
+up using the keybaord, @button is -1.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolbar which emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the point where the menu should appear
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the point where the menu should appear
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the mouse button the user pressed, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> return %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkToolbar::style-changed">
+<description>
+Emitted when the style of the toolbar changes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkToolbar which emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> the new #GtkToolbarStyle of the toolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeModel::row-changed">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when a row in the model has changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeModel on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath identifying the changed row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the changed row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeModel::row-deleted">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when a row has been deleted.
+
+Note that no iterator is passed to the signal handler,
+since the row is already deleted.
+
+This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
+The location pointed to by @path should be the location that
+the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeModel on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath identifying the row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeModel::row-has-child-toggled">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when a row has gotten the first child
+row or lost its last child row.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeModel on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath identifying the row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeModel::row-inserted">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when a new row has been inserted in
+the model.
+
+Note that the row may still be empty at this point, since
+it is a common pattern to first insert an empty row, and
+then fill it with the desired values.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeModel on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath identifying the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeModel::rows-reordered">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when the children of a node in the
+#GtkTreeModel have been reordered.
+
+Note that this signal is <emphasis>not</emphasis> emitted
+when rows are reordered by DND, since this is implemented
+by removing and then reinserting the row.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeModel on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath identifying the tree node whose children
+have been reordered
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the node whose
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the current position
+of each child to its old position before the re-ordering,
+i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeSelection::changed">
+<description>
+Emitted whenever the selection has (possibly) changed. Please note that
+this signal is mostly a hint. It may only be emitted once when a range
+of rows are selected, and it may occasionally be emitted when nothing
+has happened.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="treeselection">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed">
+<description>
+The ::sort-column-changed signal is emitted when the sort column
+or sort order of @sortable is changed. The signal is emitted before
+the contents of @sortable are resorted.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="sortable">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeView::columns-changed">
+<description>
+The number of columns of the treeview has changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeView::cursor-changed">
+<description>
+The position of the cursor (focused cell) has changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeView::row-activated">
+<description>
+The "row-activated" signal is emitted when the method
+gtk_tree_view_row_activated() is called or the user double clicks
+a treeview row. It is also emitted when a non-editable row is
+selected and one of the keys: Space, Shift+Space, Return or
+Enter is pressed.
+
+For selection handling refer to the <link linkend="TreeWidget">tree
+widget conceptual overview</link> as well as #GtkTreeSelection.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreePath for the activated row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTreeViewColumn in which the activation occurred
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeView::row-collapsed">
+<description>
+The given row has been collapsed (child nodes are hidden).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> the tree iter of the collapsed row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a tree path that points to the row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeView::row-expanded">
+<description>
+The given row has been expanded (child nodes are shown).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> the tree iter of the expanded row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a tree path that points to the row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeView::test-collapse-row">
+<description>
+The given row is about to be collapsed (hide its children nodes). Use this
+signal if you need to control the collapsibility of individual rows.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> the tree iter of the row to collapse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a tree path that points to the row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %FALSE to allow collapsing, %TRUE to reject
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkTreeView::test-expand-row">
+<description>
+The given row is about to be expanded (show its children nodes). Use this
+signal if you need to control the expandability of individual rows.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> the tree iter of the row to expand
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a tree path that points to the row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %FALSE to allow expansion, %TRUE to reject
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkUIManager::actions-changed">
+<description>
+The ::actions-changed signal is emitted whenever the set of actions
+changes.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkUIManager::add-widget">
+<description>
+The ::add-widget signal is emitted for each generated menubar and toolbar.
+It is not emitted for generated popup menus, which can be obtained by
+gtk_ui_manager_get_widget().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the added widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkUIManager::connect-proxy">
+<description>
+The ::connect-proxy signal is emitted after connecting a proxy to
+an action in the group.
+
+This is intended for simple customizations for which a custom action
+class would be too clumsy, e.g. showing tooltips for menuitems in the
+statusbar.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> the ui manager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> the proxy
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkUIManager::disconnect-proxy">
+<description>
+The ::disconnect-proxy signal is emitted after disconnecting a proxy
+from an action in the group.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> the ui manager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> the proxy
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkUIManager::post-activate">
+<description>
+The ::post-activate signal is emitted just after the @action
+is activated.
+
+This is intended for applications to get notification
+just after any action is activated.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> the ui manager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkUIManager::pre-activate">
+<description>
+The ::pre-activate signal is emitted just before the @action
+is activated.
+
+This is intended for applications to get notification
+just before any action is activated.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> the ui manager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::accel-closures-changed">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::button-press-event">
+<description>
+The ::button-press-event signal will be emitted when a button
+(typically from a mouse) is pressed.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the
+widget needs to enable the #GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventButton which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::button-release-event">
+<description>
+The ::button-release-event signal will be emitted when a button
+(typically from a mouse) is released.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the
+widget needs to enable the #GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventButton which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::can-activate-accel">
+<description>
+Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
+identified by @signal_id can currently be activated.
+This signal is present to allow applications and derived
+widgets to override the default #GtkWidget handling
+for determining whether an accelerator can be activated.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="signal_id">
+<parameter_description> the ID of a signal installed on @widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal can be activated.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::child-notify">
+<description>
+The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
+<link linkend="child-properties">child property</link> that has
+changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pspec">
+<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec of the changed child property
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::composited-changed">
+<description>
+The ::composited-changed signal is emitted when the composited
+status of @widget<!-- -->s screen changes.
+See gdk_screen_is_composited().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::configure-event">
+<description>
+The ::configure-event signal will be emitted when the size, position or
+stacking of the @widget's window has changed.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask
+automatically for all new windows.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventConfigure which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::damage-event">
+<description>
+Emitted when a redirected window belonging to @widget gets drawn into.
+The region/area members of the event shows what area of the redirected
+drawable was drawn into.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventExpose event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::delete-event">
+<description>
+The ::delete-event signal is emitted if a user requests that
+a toplevel window is closed. The default handler for this signal
+destroys the window. Connecting gtk_widget_hide_on_delete() to
+this signal will cause the window to be hidden instead, so that
+it can later be shown again without reconstructing it.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the event which triggered this signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::destroy">
+<description>
+Signals that all holders of a reference to the widget should release
+the reference that they hold. May result in finalization of the widget
+if all references are released.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::destroy-event">
+<description>
+The ::destroy-event signal is emitted when a #GdkWindow is destroyed.
+You rarely get this signal, because most widgets disconnect themselves
+from their window before they destroy it, so no widget owns the
+window at destroy time.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask
+automatically for all new windows.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the event which triggered this signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::direction-changed">
+<description>
+The ::direction-changed signal is emitted when the text direction
+of a widget changes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="previous_direction">
+<parameter_description> the previous text direction of @widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::drag-begin">
+<description>
+The ::drag-begin signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag is
+started. A typical reason to connect to this signal is to set up a
+custom drag icon with gtk_drag_source_set_icon().
+
+Note that some widgets set up a drag icon in the default handler of
+this signal, so you may have to use g_signal_connect_after() to
+override what the default handler did.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_context">
+<parameter_description> the drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::drag-data-delete">
+<description>
+The ::drag-data-delete signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag
+with the action %GDK_ACTION_MOVE is successfully completed. The signal
+handler is responsible for deleting the data that has been dropped. What
+"delete" means depends on the context of the drag operation.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_context">
+<parameter_description> the drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::drag-data-get">
+<description>
+The ::drag-data-get signal is emitted on the drag source when the drop
+site requests the data which is dragged. It is the responsibility of
+the signal handler to fill @data with the data in the format which
+is indicated by @info. See gtk_selection_data_set() and
+gtk_selection_data_set_text().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_context">
+<parameter_description> the drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkSelectionData to be filled with the dragged data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> the info that has been registered with the target in the
+#GtkTargetList
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time">
+<parameter_description> the timestamp at which the data was requested
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::drag-data-received">
+<description>
+The ::drag-data-received signal is emitted on the drop site when the
+dragged data has been received. If the data was received in order to
+determine whether the drop will be accepted, the handler is expected
+to call gdk_drag_status() and <emphasis>not</emphasis> finish the drag.
+If the data was received in response to a #GtkWidget::drag-drop signal
+(and this is the last target to be received), the handler for this
+signal is expected to process the received data and then call
+gtk_drag_finish(), setting the @success parameter depending on whether
+the data was processed successfully.
+
+The handler may inspect and modify @drag_context->action before calling
+gtk_drag_finish(), e.g. to implement %GDK_ACTION_ASK as shown in the
+following example:
+|[
+void
+drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
+GdkDragContext *drag_context,
+gint x,
+gint y,
+GtkSelectionData *data,
+guint info,
+guint time)
+{
+if ((data->length >= 0) && (data->format == 8))
+{
+if (drag_context->action == GDK_ACTION_ASK)
+{
+GtkWidget *dialog;
+gint response;
+
+dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (NULL,
+GTK_DIALOG_MODAL |
+GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
+GTK_MESSAGE_INFO,
+GTK_BUTTONS_YES_NO,
+"Move the data ?\n");
+response = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
+gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
+
+if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_YES)
+drag_context->action = GDK_ACTION_MOVE;
+else
+drag_context->action = GDK_ACTION_COPY;
+}
+
+gtk_drag_finish (drag_context, TRUE, FALSE, time);
+return;
+}
+
+gtk_drag_finish (drag_context, FALSE, FALSE, time);
+}
+]|
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_context">
+<parameter_description> the drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> where the drop happened
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> where the drop happened
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> the received data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> the info that has been registered with the target in the
+#GtkTargetList
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time">
+<parameter_description> the timestamp at which the data was received
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::drag-drop">
+<description>
+The ::drag-drop signal is emitted on the drop site when the user drops
+the data onto the widget. The signal handler must determine whether
+the cursor position is in a drop zone or not. If it is not in a drop
+zone, it returns %FALSE and no further processing is necessary.
+Otherwise, the handler returns %TRUE. In this case, the handler must
+ensure that gtk_drag_finish() is called to let the source know that
+the drop is done. The call to gtk_drag_finish() can be done either
+directly or in a #GtkWidget::drag-data-received handler which gets
+triggered by calling gtk_drag_get_data() to receive the data for one
+or more of the supported targets.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_context">
+<parameter_description> the drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the current cursor position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the current cursor position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time">
+<parameter_description> the timestamp of the motion event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the cursor position is in a drop zone
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::drag-end">
+<description>
+The ::drag-end signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag is
+finished. A typical reason to connect to this signal is to undo
+things done in #GtkWidget::drag-begin.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_context">
+<parameter_description> the drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::drag-failed">
+<description>
+The ::drag-failed signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag has
+failed. The signal handler may hook custom code to handle a failed DND
+operation based on the type of error, it returns %TRUE is the failure has
+been already handled (not showing the default "drag operation failed"
+animation), otherwise it returns %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_context">
+<parameter_description> the drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="result">
+<parameter_description> the result of the drag operation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the failed drag operation has been already handled.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::drag-leave">
+<description>
+The ::drag-leave signal is emitted on the drop site when the cursor
+leaves the widget. A typical reason to connect to this signal is to
+undo things done in #GtkWidget::drag-motion, e.g. undo highlighting
+with gtk_drag_unhighlight()
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_context">
+<parameter_description> the drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time">
+<parameter_description> the timestamp of the motion event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::drag-motion">
+<description>
+The drag-motion signal is emitted on the drop site when the user
+moves the cursor over the widget during a drag. The signal handler
+must determine whether the cursor position is in a drop zone or not.
+If it is not in a drop zone, it returns %FALSE and no further processing
+is necessary. Otherwise, the handler returns %TRUE. In this case, the
+handler is responsible for providing the necessary information for
+displaying feedback to the user, by calling gdk_drag_status().
+
+If the decision whether the drop will be accepted or rejected can't be
+made based solely on the cursor position and the type of the data, the
+handler may inspect the dragged data by calling gtk_drag_get_data() and
+defer the gdk_drag_status() call to the #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
+handler. Note that you cannot not pass #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP,
+#GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION or #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL to gtk_drag_dest_set()
+when using the drag-motion signal that way.
+
+Also note that there is no drag-enter signal. The drag receiver has to
+keep track of whether he has received any drag-motion signals since the
+last #GtkWidget::drag-leave and if not, treat the drag-motion signal as
+an "enter" signal. Upon an "enter", the handler will typically highlight
+the drop site with gtk_drag_highlight().
+|[
+static void
+drag_motion (GtkWidget *widget,
+GdkDragContext *context,
+gint x,
+gint y,
+guint time)
+{
+GdkAtom target;
+
+PrivateData *private_data = GET_PRIVATE_DATA (widget);
+
+if (!private_data->drag_highlight)
+{
+private_data->drag_highlight = 1;
+gtk_drag_highlight (widget);
+}
+
+target = gtk_drag_dest_find_target (widget, context, NULL);
+if (target == GDK_NONE)
+gdk_drag_status (context, 0, time);
+else
+{
+private_data->pending_status = context->suggested_action;
+gtk_drag_get_data (widget, context, target, time);
+}
+
+return TRUE;
+}
+
+static void
+drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
+GdkDragContext *context,
+gint x,
+gint y,
+GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
+guint info,
+guint time)
+{
+PrivateData *private_data = GET_PRIVATE_DATA (widget);
+
+if (private_data->suggested_action)
+{
+private_data->suggested_action = 0;
+
+/ * We are getting this data due to a request in drag_motion,
+* rather than due to a request in drag_drop, so we are just
+* supposed to call gdk_drag_status (), not actually paste in
+* the data.
+* /
+str = gtk_selection_data_get_text (selection_data);
+if (!data_is_acceptable (str))
+gdk_drag_status (context, 0, time);
+else
+gdk_drag_status (context, private_data->suggested_action, time);
+}
+else
+{
+/ * accept the drop * /
+}
+}
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drag_context">
+<parameter_description> the drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the current cursor position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the current cursor position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time">
+<parameter_description> the timestamp of the motion event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the cursor position is in a drop zone
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::draw">
+<description>
+This signal is emitted when a widget is supposed to render itself.
+The @widget's top left corner must be painted at the origin of
+the passed in context and be sized to the values returned by
+gtk_widget_get_allocated_width() and
+gtk_widget_get_allocated_height().
+
+Signal handlers connected to this signal can modify the cairo
+context passed as @cr in any way they like and don't need to
+restore it. The signal emission takes care of calling cairo_save()
+before and cairo_restore() after invoking the handler.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cr">
+<parameter_description> the cairo context to draw to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::enter-notify-event">
+<description>
+The ::enter-notify-event will be emitted when the pointer enters
+the @widget's window.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventCrossing which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::event">
+<description>
+The GTK+ main loop will emit three signals for each GDK event delivered
+to a widget: one generic ::event signal, another, more specific,
+signal that matches the type of event delivered (e.g.
+#GtkWidget::key-press-event) and finally a generic
+#GtkWidget::event-after signal.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEvent which triggered this signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event
+and to cancel the emission of the second specific ::event signal.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further and to allow the emission of
+the second signal. The ::event-after signal is emitted regardless of
+the return value.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::event-after">
+<description>
+After the emission of the #GtkWidget::event signal and (optionally)
+the second more specific signal, ::event-after will be emitted
+regardless of the previous two signals handlers return values.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEvent which triggered this signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::focus">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::focus-in-event">
+<description>
+The ::focus-in-event signal will be emitted when the keyboard focus
+enters the @widget's window.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK mask.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventFocus which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::focus-out-event">
+<description>
+The ::focus-out-event signal will be emitted when the keyboard focus
+leaves the @widget's window.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK mask.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventFocus which triggered this
+signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::grab-broken-event">
+<description>
+Emitted when a pointer or keyboard grab on a window belonging
+to @widget gets broken.
+
+On X11, this happens when the grab window becomes unviewable
+(i.e. it or one of its ancestors is unmapped), or if the same
+application grabs the pointer or keyboard again.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventGrabBroken event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for
+the event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::grab-focus">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::grab-notify">
+<description>
+The ::grab-notify signal is emitted when a widget becomes
+shadowed by a GTK+ grab (not a pointer or keyboard grab) on
+another widget, or when it becomes unshadowed due to a grab
+being removed.
+
+A widget is shadowed by a gtk_grab_add() when the topmost
+grab widget in the grab stack of its window group is not
+its ancestor.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="was_grabbed">
+<parameter_description> %FALSE if the widget becomes shadowed, %TRUE
+if it becomes unshadowed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::hide">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::hierarchy-changed">
+<description>
+The ::hierarchy-changed signal is emitted when the
+anchored state of a widget changes. A widget is
+<firstterm>anchored</firstterm> when its toplevel
+ancestor is a #GtkWindow. This signal is emitted when
+a widget changes from un-anchored to anchored or vice-versa.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="previous_toplevel">
+<parameter_description> the previous toplevel ancestor, or %NULL
+if the widget was previously unanchored
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::key-press-event">
+<description>
+The ::key-press-event signal is emitted when a key is pressed. The signal
+emission will reoccur at the key-repeat rate when the key is kept pressed.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventKey which triggered this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::key-release-event">
+<description>
+The ::key-release-event signal is emitted when a key is released.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventKey which triggered this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::keynav-failed">
+<description>
+Gets emitted if keyboard navigation fails.
+See gtk_widget_keynav_failed() for details.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> the direction of movement
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, %FALSE
+if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard
+navigation attempt in its parent container(s).
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::leave-notify-event">
+<description>
+The ::leave-notify-event will be emitted when the pointer leaves
+the @widget's window.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventCrossing which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::map">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::map-event">
+<description>
+The ::map-event signal will be emitted when the @widget's window is
+mapped. A window is mapped when it becomes visible on the screen.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask
+automatically for all new windows.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventAny which triggered this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="arg1">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::motion-notify-event">
+<description>
+The ::motion-notify-event signal is emitted when the pointer moves
+over the widget's #GdkWindow.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget
+needs to enable the #GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventMotion which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::move-focus">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::parent-set">
+<description>
+The ::parent-set signal is emitted when a new parent
+has been set on a widget.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="old_parent">
+<parameter_description> the previous parent, or %NULL if the widget
+just got its initial parent.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::popup-menu">
+<description>
+This signal gets emitted whenever a widget should pop up a context
+menu. This usually happens through the standard key binding mechanism;
+by pressing a certain key while a widget is focused, the user can cause
+the widget to pop up a menu. For example, the #GtkEntry widget creates
+a menu with clipboard commands. See <xref linkend="checklist-popup-menu"/>
+for an example of how to use this signal.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if a menu was activated
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::property-notify-event">
+<description>
+The ::property-notify-event signal will be emitted when a property on
+the @widget's window has been changed or deleted.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK mask.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventProperty which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::proximity-in-event">
+<description>
+To receive this signal the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_PROXIMITY_IN_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventProximity which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::proximity-out-event">
+<description>
+To receive this signal the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventProximity which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::query-tooltip">
+<description>
+Emitted when #GtkWidget:has-tooltip is %TRUE and the #GtkSettings:gtk-tooltip-timeout
+has expired with the cursor hovering "above" @widget; or emitted when @widget got
+focus in keyboard mode.
+
+Using the given coordinates, the signal handler should determine
+whether a tooltip should be shown for @widget. If this is the case
+%TRUE should be returned, %FALSE otherwise. Note that if
+ keyboard_mode is %TRUE, the values of @x and @y are undefined and
+should not be used.
+
+The signal handler is free to manipulate @tooltip with the therefore
+destined function calls.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the cursor position where the request has
+been emitted, relative to @widget's left side
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the cursor position where the request has
+been emitted, relative to @widget's top
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyboard_mode">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tooltip was trigged using the keyboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @tooltip should be shown right now, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::realize">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::screen-changed">
+<description>
+The ::screen-changed signal gets emitted when the
+screen of a widget has changed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="previous_screen">
+<parameter_description> the previous screen, or %NULL if the
+widget was not associated with a screen before
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::scroll-event">
+<description>
+The ::scroll-event signal is emitted when a button in the 4 to 7
+range is pressed. Wheel mice are usually configured to generate
+button press events for buttons 4 and 5 when the wheel is turned.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK mask.
+
+This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventScroll which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::selection-clear-event">
+<description>
+The ::selection-clear-event signal will be emitted when the
+the @widget's window has lost ownership of a selection.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventSelection which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::selection-get">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::selection-notify-event">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::selection-received">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::selection-request-event">
+<description>
+The ::selection-request-event signal will be emitted when
+another client requests ownership of the selection owned by
+the @widget's window.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventSelection which triggered
+this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::show">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::show-help">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="help_type">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::size-allocate">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="allocation">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::state-changed">
+<description>
+The ::state-changed signal is emitted when the widget state changes.
+See gtk_widget_get_state().
+
+Deprecated: 3.0. Use #GtkWidget::state-flags-changed instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> the previous state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::state-flags-changed">
+<description>
+The ::state-flags-changed signal is emitted when the widget state
+changes, see gtk_widget_get_state_flags().
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> The previous state flags.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::style-set">
+<description>
+The ::style-set signal is emitted when a new style has been set
+on a widget. Note that style-modifying functions like
+gtk_widget_modify_base() also cause this signal to be emitted.
+
+Note that this signal is emitted for changes to the deprecated
+#GtkStyle. To track changes to the #GtkStyleContext associated
+with a widget, use the #GtkWidget::style-updated signal.
+
+Deprecated:3.0: Use the #GtkWidget::style-updated signal
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="previous_style">
+<parameter_description> the previous style, or %NULL if the widget
+just got its initial style
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::style-updated">
+<description>
+The ::style-updated signal is emitted when the #GtkStyleContext
+of a widget is changed. Note that style-modifying functions like
+gtk_widget_override_color() also cause this signal to be emitted.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::unmap">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::unmap-event">
+<description>
+The ::unmap-event signal will be emitted when the @widget's window is
+unmapped. A window is unmapped when it becomes invisible on the screen.
+
+To receive this signal, the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask
+automatically for all new windows.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventAny which triggered this signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::unrealize">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::visibility-notify-event">
+<description>
+The ::visibility-notify-event will be emitted when the @widget's window
+is obscured or unobscured.
+
+To receive this signal the #GdkWindow associated to the widget needs
+to enable the #GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK mask.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventVisibility which
+triggered this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event.
+%FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWidget::window-state-event">
+<description>
+The ::window-state-event will be emitted when the state of the
+toplevel window associated to the @widget changes.
+
+To receive this signal the #GdkWindow associated to the widget
+needs to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable
+this mask automatically for all new windows.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkEventWindowState which
+triggered this signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked for the
+event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
+</return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWindow::activate-default">
+<description>
+The ::activate-default signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user activates the default widget
+of @window.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the window which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWindow::activate-focus">
+<description>
+The ::activate-focus signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user activates the currently
+focused widget of @window.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the window which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
+<signal name="GtkWindow::keys-changed">
+<description>
+The ::keys-changed signal gets emitted when the set of accelerators
+or mnemonics that are associated with @window changes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the window which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</signal>
+
<function name="add_file">
<description>
Adds the given @file with its associated @info to the @model.
@@ -22,6 +7748,30 @@ If the model is frozen, the file will only show up after it is thawn.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_add_credit_section">
+<description>
+Creates a new section in the Credits page.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="section_name">
+<parameter_description> The name of the section
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="people">
+<parameter_description> The people who belong to that section
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_artists">
<description>
Returns the string which are displayed in the artists tab
@@ -772,6 +8522,7 @@ gtk_accel_group_connect().
Since 2.20 @closure can be %NULL.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accel_group">
@@ -793,6 +8544,7 @@ group, or %NULL to remove all closures
Removes an accelerator previously installed through
gtk_accel_group_connect().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accel_group">
@@ -818,6 +8570,7 @@ removed, %FALSE otherwise
Finds the first entry in an accelerator group for which
@find_func returns %TRUE and returns its #GtkAccelKey.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accel_group">
@@ -844,6 +8597,7 @@ of @accel_group with
Finds the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected;
see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="closure">
@@ -921,6 +8675,7 @@ of times.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAccelGroup.
+
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
@@ -933,6 +8688,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkAccelGroup.
Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching @accel_key
and @accel_mods.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accel_group">
@@ -1108,7 +8864,7 @@ must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
<function name="gtk_accel_label_set_accel_widget">
<description>
-Sets the widget to be monitored by this accelerator label.
+Sets the widget to be monitored by this accelerator label.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1185,9 +8941,10 @@ might not be the case if conflicting accelerators are locked). Successful
changes are indicated by a %TRUE return value.
Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
g_intern_static_string().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accel_path">
@@ -1207,7 +8964,7 @@ g_intern_static_string().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator could be changed, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator could be changed, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
@@ -1356,6 +9113,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accel_path">
@@ -1367,7 +9125,7 @@ Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
@@ -1426,6 +9184,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
+
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
@@ -1456,6 +9215,38 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_label_with_keycode">
+<description>
+Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
+into a (possibly translated) string that can be displayed to
+a user, similarly to gtk_accelerator_get_label(), but handling
+keycodes.
+
+This is only useful for system-level components, applications
+should use gtk_accelerator_parse() instead.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay or %NULL to use the default display
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
+<parameter_description> accelerator modifier mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly-allocated string representing the accelerator.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accelerator_name">
<description>
Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
@@ -1482,6 +9273,36 @@ see gtk_accelerator_get_label().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_name_with_keycode">
+<description>
+Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
+into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse_full(),
+similarly to gtk_accelerator_name() but handling keycodes.
+This is only useful for system-level components, applications
+should use gtk_accelerator_parse() instead.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay or %NULL to use the default display
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
+<parameter_description> accelerator modifier mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly allocated accelerator name.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accelerator_parse">
<description>
Parses a string representing an accelerator. The
@@ -1517,6 +9338,46 @@ modifier mask, %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_parse_with_keycode">
+<description>
+Parses a string representing an accelerator, similarly to
+gtk_accelerator_parse() but handles keycodes as well. This is only
+useful for system-level components, applications should use
+gtk_accelerator_parse() instead.
+
+If a keycode is present in the accelerator and no @accelerator_codes
+is given, the parse will fail.
+
+If the parse fails, @accelerator_key, @accelerator_mods and
+ accelerator_codes will be set to 0 (zero).
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accelerator">
+<parameter_description> string representing an accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator_key">
+<parameter_description> return location for accelerator
+keyval, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator_codes">
+<parameter_description> return location for accelerator
+keycodes, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
+<parameter_description> return location for accelerator
+modifier mask, %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask">
<description>
Sets the modifiers that will be considered significant for keyboard
@@ -1549,6 +9410,7 @@ plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_KEY_Control_L keyval
as an accelerator.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="keyval">
@@ -1569,6 +9431,8 @@ as an accelerator.
This function specifies the callback function to be called
when the widget corresponding to a GtkAccessible is destroyed.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_accessible_set_widget() and its vfuncs.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accessible">
@@ -1604,6 +9468,10 @@ corresponding to the #GtkAccessible, or %NULL.
<description>
Sets the #GtkWidget corresponding to the #GtkAccessible.
+<note><para>@accessible will not hold a reference to @widget.
+It is the caller's responsibility to ensure that when @widget
+is destroyed, the widget is unset by calling this function
+again with @widget set to %NULL.</para></note>
Since: 2.22
</description>
@@ -1613,7 +9481,7 @@ Since: 2.22
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget or %NULL to unset
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3004,6 +10872,176 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_actionable_get_action_name">
+<description>
+Gets the action name for @actionable.
+
+See gtk_actionable_set_action_name() for more information.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="actionable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActionable widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the action name, or %NULL if none is set
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_actionable_get_action_target_value">
+<description>
+Gets the current target value of @actionabe.
+
+See gtk_actionable_set_target_value() for more information.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="actionable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActionable widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current target value
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_actionable_set_action_name">
+<description>
+Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
+associated. If @action_name is %NULL then the widget will be
+unassociated from any previous action.
+
+Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
+located) within the hierarchy of a #GtkApplicationWindow.
+
+Names are of the form "win.save" or "app.quit" for actions on the
+containing #GtkApplicationWindow or its associated #GtkApplication,
+respectively. This is the same form used for actions in the #GMenu
+associated with the window.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="actionable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActionable widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action_name">
+<parameter_description> an action name, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_actionable_set_action_target">
+<description>
+Sets the target of an actionable widget.
+
+This is a convenience function that calls g_variant_new() for
+ format_string and uses the result to call
+gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value().
+
+If you are setting a string-valued target and want to set the action
+name at the same time, you can use
+gtk_actionable_set_detailed_action_name ().
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="actionable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActionable widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="format_string">
+<parameter_description> a GVariant format string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments appropriate for @format_string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value">
+<description>
+Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
+
+If @target_value is %NULL then the target value is unset.
+
+The target value has two purposes. First, it is used as the
+parameter to activation of the action associated with the
+#GtkActionable widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
+should be rendered as "active" - the widget is active if the state
+is equal to the given target.
+
+Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a #GAction
+with string state in a typical "radio button" situation. Each button
+will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
+value for that action. Clicking on a particular button will activate
+the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
+the action's state to change to that value. Since the action's state
+is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
+be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
+rendered inactive).
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="actionable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActionable widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target_value">
+<parameter_description> a #GVariant to set as the target value, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_actionable_set_detailed_action_name">
+<description>
+Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
+actionable widget.
+
+This allows for the effect of both gtk_actionable_set_action_name()
+and gtk_actionable_set_target() in the common case that the target is
+string-valued.
+
+ detailed_action_name is a string of the form
+<literal>"action::target"</literal> where <literal>action</literal>
+is the action name and <literal>target</literal> is the string to use
+as the target.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="actionable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActionable widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detailed_action_name">
+<parameter_description> the detailed action name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action">
<description>
This is a utility function for #GtkActivatable implementors.
@@ -3740,9 +11778,9 @@ Since: 2.6
<description>
Appends a custom item to the list of applications that is shown
in the popup; the item name must be unique per-widget.
-Clients can use the provided name as a detail for the ::custom-item-activated
-signal, to add a callback for the activation of a particular
-custom item in the list.
+Clients can use the provided name as a detail for the
+#GtkAppChooserButton::custom-item-activated signal, to add a
+callback for the activation of a particular custom item in the list.
See also gtk_app_chooser_button_append_separator().
Since: 3.0
@@ -3798,8 +11836,27 @@ Returns the text to display at the top of the dialog.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text to display at the top of the dialog, or %NULL, in which
-case a default text is displayed
+<return> the text to display at the top of the dialog,
+or %NULL, in which case a default text is displayed
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_app_chooser_button_get_show_default_item">
+<description>
+Returns the current value of the #GtkAppChooserButton:show-default-item
+property.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAppChooserButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the value of #GtkAppChooserButton:show-default-item
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -3884,6 +11941,27 @@ If the heading is not set, the dialog displays a default text.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_app_chooser_button_set_show_default_item">
+<description>
+Sets whether the dropdown menu of this button should show the
+default application for the given content type at top.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAppChooserButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> the new value for #GtkAppChooserButton:show-default-item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_app_chooser_button_set_show_dialog_item">
<description>
Sets whether the dropdown menu of this button should show an
@@ -4323,6 +12401,50 @@ Since: 3.0
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_application_add_accelerator">
+<description>
+Installs an accelerator that will cause the named action
+to be activated when the key combination specificed by @accelerator
+is pressed.
+
+ accelerator must be a string that can be parsed by
+gtk_accelerator_parse(), e.g. "<Primary>q" or "<Control><Alt>p".
+
+ action_name must be the name of an action as it would be used
+in the app menu, i.e. actions that have been added to the application
+are referred to with an "app." prefix, and window-specific actions
+with a "win." prefix.
+
+GtkApplication also extracts accelerators out of 'accel' attributes
+in the #GMenuModels passed to gtk_application_set_app_menu() and
+gtk_application_set_menubar(), which is usually more convenient
+than calling this function for each accelerator.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accelerator">
+<parameter_description> accelerator string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the action to activate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parameter">
+<parameter_description> parameter to pass when activating the action,
+or %NULL if the action does not accept an activation parameter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_application_add_window">
<description>
Adds a window from @application.
@@ -4353,12 +12475,82 @@ Since: 3.0
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_application_end_session">
+<description>
+Requests that the session manager end the current session.
+ style indicates how the session should be ended, and
+ request_confirmation indicates whether or not the user should be
+given a chance to confirm the action. Both of these parameters are
+merely hints though; the session manager may choose to ignore them.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> the desired kind of session end
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="request_confirmation">
+<parameter_description> whether or not the user should get a chance
+to confirm the action
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the request was sent; %FALSE if it could not
+be sent (eg, because it could not connect to the session manager)
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_application_get_app_menu">
+<description>
+Returns the menu model that has been set with
+gtk_application_set_app_menu().
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the application menu of @application
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_application_get_menubar">
+<description>
+Returns the menu model that has been set with
+gtk_application_set_menubar().
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the menubar for windows of @application
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_application_get_windows">
<description>
-Gets a list of the #GtkWindow<!-- -->s associated with @application.
+Gets a list of the #GtkWindows associated with @application.
The list is sorted by most recently focused window, such that the first
-element is the currently focused window. (Useful for choosing a parent
+element is the currently focused window. (Useful for choosing a parent
for a transient window.)
The list that is returned should not be modified in any way. It will
@@ -4379,6 +12571,83 @@ Since: 3.0
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_application_inhibit">
+<description>
+Inform the session manager that certain types of actions should be
+inhibited. This is not guaranteed to work on all platforms and for
+all types of actions.
+
+Applications should invoke this method when they begin an operation
+that should not be interrupted, such as creating a CD or DVD. The
+types of actions that may be blocked are specified by the @flags
+parameter. When the application completes the operation it should
+call g_application_uninhibit() to remove the inhibitor. Note that
+an application can have multiple inhibitors, and all of the must
+be individually removed. Inhibitors are also cleared when the
+application exits.
+
+Applications should not expect that they will always be able to block
+the action. In most cases, users will be given the option to force
+the action to take place.
+
+Reasons should be short and to the point.
+
+If @window is given, the session manager may point the user to
+this window to find out more about why the action is inhibited.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the #GApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> what types of actions should be inhibited
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reason">
+<parameter_description> a short, human-readable string that explains
+why these operations are inhibited
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A non-zero cookie that is used to uniquely identify this
+request. It should be used as an argument to g_application_uninhibit()
+in order to remove the request. If the platform does not support
+inhibiting or the request failed for some reason, 0 is returned.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_application_is_inhibited">
+<description>
+Determines if any of the actions specified in @flags are
+currently inhibited (possibly by another application).
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the #GApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> what types of actions should be queried
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if any of the actions specified in @flags are inhibited
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_application_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkApplication instance.
@@ -4386,8 +12655,21 @@ Creates a new #GtkApplication instance.
This function calls g_type_init() for you. gtk_init() is called
as soon as the application gets registered as the primary instance.
+Concretely, gtk_init() is called in the default handler for the
+startup() signal. Therefore, #GtkApplication subclasses should
+chain up in their startup() handler before using any GTK+ API.
+
+Note that commandline arguments are not passed to gtk_init().
+All GTK+ functionality that is available via commandline arguments
+can also be achieved by setting suitable environment variables
+such as <envar>G_DEBUG</envar>, so this should not be a big
+problem. If you absolutely must support GTK+ commandline arguments,
+you can explicitly call gtk_init() before creating the application
+instance.
+
The application id must be valid. See g_application_id_is_valid().
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4401,9 +12683,36 @@ The application id must be valid. See g_application_id_is_valid().
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkApplication instance
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_application_remove_accelerator">
+<description>
+Removes an accelerator that has been previously added
+with gtk_application_add_accelerator().
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the action to activate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parameter">
+<parameter_description> parameter to pass when activating the action,
+or %NULL if the action does not accept an activation parameter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_application_remove_window">
<description>
Remove a window from @application.
@@ -4431,6 +12740,144 @@ Since: 3.0
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_application_set_app_menu">
+<description>
+Sets or unsets the application menu for @application.
+
+The application menu is a single menu containing items that typically
+impact the application as a whole, rather than acting on a specific
+window or document. For example, you would expect to see
+"Preferences" or "Quit" in an application menu, but not "Save" or
+"Print".
+
+If supported, the application menu will be rendered by the desktop
+environment.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="app_menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GMenuModel, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_application_set_menubar">
+<description>
+Sets or unsets the menubar for windows of @application.
+
+This is a menubar in the traditional sense.
+
+Depending on the desktop environment, this may appear at the top of
+each window, or at the top of the screen. In some environments, if
+both the application menu and the menubar are set, the application
+menu will be presented as if it were the first item of the menubar.
+Other environments treat the two as completely separate -- for
+example, the application menu may be rendered by the desktop shell
+while the menubar (if set) remains in each individual window.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menubar">
+<parameter_description> a #GMenuModel, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_application_uninhibit">
+<description>
+Removes an inhibitor that has been established with g_application_inhibit().
+Inhibitors are also cleared when the application exits.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> the #GApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cookie">
+<parameter_description> a cookie that was returned by g_application_inhibit()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_application_window_get_show_menubar">
+<description>
+Returns whether the window will display a menubar for the app menu
+and menubar as needed.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplicationWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @window will display a menubar when needed
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_application_window_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkApplicationWindow.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="application">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly created #GtkApplicationWindow
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_application_window_set_show_menubar">
+<description>
+Sets whether the window will display a menubar for the app menu
+and menubar as needed.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplicationWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_menubar">
+<parameter_description> whether to show a menubar when needed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_arrow_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkArrow widget.
@@ -4932,7 +13379,7 @@ Since: 3.2
</parameter>
<parameter name="page_num">
<parameter_description> the index of a page in the @assistant,
-or -1 to get the last page
+or -1 to remove the last page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -5210,7 +13657,7 @@ arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
+<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6145,6 +14592,37 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_resource">
+<description>
+Parses a resource file containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
+
+Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_RESOURCE_ERROR
+domain.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resource_path">
+<parameter_description> the path of the resource file to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_string">
<description>
Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
@@ -6221,6 +14699,48 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_resource">
+<description>
+Parses a resource file containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
+them with the current contents of @builder.
+
+Upon errors 0 will be returned and @error will be assigned a
+#GError from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_RESOURCE_ERROR
+domain.
+
+<note><para>
+If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
+its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
+#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
+</para></note>
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resource_path">
+<parameter_description> the path of the resource file to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="object_ids">
+<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
<description>
Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
@@ -6966,11 +15486,12 @@ text.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkButton containing a label.
If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
-underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
accelerator called a mnemonic.
Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="label">
@@ -9352,11 +17873,14 @@ Since: 3.0
<function name="gtk_cell_area_stop_editing">
<description>
-Explicitly stops the editing of the currently
-edited cell (see gtk_cell_area_get_edited_cell()).
+Explicitly stops the editing of the currently edited cell.
-If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit
-the ::editing-canceled signal.
+If @canceled is %TRUE, the currently edited cell renderer
+will emit the ::editing-canceled signal, otherwise the
+the ::editing-done signal will be emitted on the current
+edit widget.
+
+See gtk_cell_area_get_edited_cell() and gtk_cell_area_get_edit_widget().
Since: 3.0
@@ -10834,6 +19358,8 @@ Sets the background color of @view.
Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_cell_view_set_background_rgba() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="cell_view">
@@ -11025,6 +19551,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkCheckButton containing a label. The label
will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
in @label indicate the mnemonic for the check button.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="label">
@@ -11122,11 +19649,12 @@ Creates a new #GtkCheckMenuItem containing a label. The label
will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="label">
<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -12094,6 +20622,8 @@ Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_color_button_get_rgba() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="color_button">
@@ -12190,6 +20720,8 @@ Creates a new color button.
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_color_button_new_with_rgba() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="color">
@@ -12246,6 +20778,8 @@ Sets the current color to be @color.
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: Use gtk_color_button_set_rgba() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="color_button">
@@ -12374,6 +20908,8 @@ Returns the current alpha value.
<description>
Sets @color to be the current color in the GtkColorSelection widget.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_color_selection_get_current_rgba() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="colorsel">
@@ -12461,6 +20997,8 @@ Returns the previous alpha value.
<description>
Fills @color in with the original color value.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_color_selection_get_previous_rgba() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="colorsel">
@@ -12621,6 +21159,8 @@ Sets the current color to be @color.
The first time this is called, it will also set
the original color to be @color too.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_rgba() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="colorsel">
@@ -12746,6 +21286,8 @@ as it might seem confusing to have that color change.
Calling gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() will also
set this color the first time it is called.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_color_selection_set_previous_rgba() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="colorsel">
@@ -13767,7 +22309,7 @@ Since: 2.24
<function name="gtk_combo_box_text_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkComboBoxText, which is a #GtkComboBox just displaying
-strings. See gtk_combo_box_entry_new_with_text().
+strings.
Since: 2.24
@@ -13885,10 +22427,10 @@ Since: 3.0
<description>
Adds @widget to @container. Typically used for simple containers
such as #GtkWindow, #GtkFrame, or #GtkButton; for more complicated
-layout containers such as #GtkBox or #GtkTable, this function will
+layout containers such as #GtkBox or #GtkGrid, this function will
pick default packing parameters that may not be correct. So
consider functions such as gtk_box_pack_start() and
-gtk_table_attach() as an alternative to gtk_container_add() in
+gtk_grid_attach() as an alternative to gtk_container_add() in
those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
@@ -14149,6 +22691,7 @@ children.
<description>
Finds a child property of a container class by name.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="cclass">
@@ -14160,8 +22703,8 @@ Finds a child property of a container class by name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GParamSpec of the child property or
-%NULL if @class has no child property with that name.
+<return> the #GParamSpec of the child property
+or %NULL if @class has no child property with that name.
</return>
</function>
@@ -14214,6 +22757,7 @@ Installs a child property on a container class.
<description>
Returns all child properties of a container class.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="cclass">
@@ -14225,9 +22769,9 @@ Returns all child properties of a container class.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly
-allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*. The
-array must be freed with g_free().
+<return>
+a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.
+The array must be freed with g_free().
</return>
</function>
@@ -14787,7 +23331,9 @@ information.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> the length of @data in bytes, or -1 for NUL terminated strings
+<parameter_description> the length of @data in bytes, or -1 for NUL terminated strings. If
+ length is not -1, the code will assume it is not NUL terminated and will
+potentially do a copy.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
@@ -14871,6 +23417,7 @@ from this function on a new provider created with
gtk_css_provider_new() will basicallu create a duplicate of
this @provider.
+Since: 3.2
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14880,9 +23427,198 @@ this @provider.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a new string representing the @provider.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_css_section_get_end_line">
+<description>
+Returns the line in the CSS document where this section end.
+The line number is 0-indexed, so the first line of the document
+will return 0.
+This value may change in future invocations of this function if
+ section is not yet parsed completely. This will for example
+happen in the GtkCssProvider::parsing-error signal.
+The end position and line may be identical to the start
+position and line for sections which failed to parse anything
+successfully.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> the section
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the line number
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_css_section_get_end_position">
+<description>
+Returns the offset in bytes from the start of the current line
+returned via gtk_css_section_get_end_line().
+This value may change in future invocations of this function if
+ section is not yet parsed completely. This will for example
+happen in the GtkCssProvider::parsing-error signal.
+The end position and line may be identical to the start
+position and line for sections which failed to parse anything
+successfully.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> the section
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the offset in bytes from the start of the line.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_css_section_get_file">
+<description>
+Gets the file that @section was parsed from. If no such file exists,
+for example because the CSS was loaded via
+ gtk_css_provider_load_from_data(), then %NULL is returned.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> the section
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GFile that @section was parsed from or %NULL if
+ section was parsed from other data.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_css_section_get_parent">
+<description>
+Gets the parent section for the given @section. The parent section is
+the section that contains this @section. A special case are sections of
+type #GTK_CSS_SECTION_TYPE_DOCUMENT. Their parent will either be %NULL
+if they are the original CSS document that was loaded by
+gtk_css_provider_load_from_file() or a section of type
+#GTK_CSS_SECTION_TYPE_IMPORT if it was loaded with an import rule from
+a different file.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> the section
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the parent section or %NULL if none
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_css_section_get_section_type">
+<description>
+Gets the type of information that @section describes.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> the section
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the type of @section
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_css_section_get_start_line">
+<description>
+Returns the line in the CSS document where this section starts.
+The line number is 0-indexed, so the first line of the document
+will return 0.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> the section
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the line number
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_css_section_get_start_position">
+<description>
+Returns the offset in bytes from the start of the current line
+returned via gtk_css_section_get_start_line().
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> the section
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the offset in bytes from the start of the line.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_css_section_ref">
+<description>
+Increments the reference count on @section.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCssSection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> @section itself.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_css_section_unref">
+<description>
+Decrements the reference count on @section, freeing the
+structure if the reference count reaches 0.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="section">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCssSection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_custom_paper_unix_dialog_new">
<description>
Creates a new custom paper dialog.
@@ -17042,6 +25778,32 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_compute_prefix">
+<description>
+Computes the common prefix that is shared by all rows in @completion
+that start with @key. If no row matches @key, %NULL will be returned.
+Note that a text column must have been set for this function to work,
+see gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column() for details.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> the entry completion
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> The text to complete for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The common prefix all rows starting with @key
+or %NULL if no row matches @key.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_delete_action">
<description>
Deletes the action at @index_ from @completion's action list.
@@ -17978,6 +26740,9 @@ gtk_entry_set_inner_border() for more information.
Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use the standard border and padding CSS properties;
+the value returned by this function is ignored by #GtkEntry.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="entry">
@@ -18817,6 +27582,9 @@ pixel-exact positioning of the entry is important.
Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use the standard border and padding CSS properties;
+the value set with this function is ignored by #GtkEntry.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="entry">
@@ -18905,9 +27673,15 @@ Since: 2.14
<function name="gtk_entry_set_placeholder_text">
<description>
-Sets text to be displayed in @entry when
-it is empty and unfocused. This can be used to give a visual hint
-of the expected contents of the #GtkEntry.
+Sets text to be displayed in @entry when it is empty and unfocused.
+This can be used to give a visual hint of the expected contents of
+the #GtkEntry.
+
+Note that since the placeholder text gets removed when the entry
+received focus, using this feature is a bit problematic if the entry
+is given the initial focus in a window. Sometimes this can be
+worked around by delaying the initial focus setting until the
+first key event arrives.
Since: 3.2
@@ -21681,7 +30455,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_title">
<description>
-Retrieves the title of the font selection dialog.
+Retrieves the title of the font chooser dialog.
Since: 2.4
@@ -21756,7 +30530,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontname">
-<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font selection dialog
+<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font chooser dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21778,12 +30552,11 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="fontname">
-<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font selection dialog
+<parameter_description> Name of font to display in font chooser dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> Return value of gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name() if the
-font selection dialog exists, otherwise %FALSE.
+<return> %TRUE
</return>
</function>
@@ -21830,7 +30603,7 @@ Since: 2.4
<function name="gtk_font_button_set_title">
<description>
-Sets the title for the font selection dialog.
+Sets the title for the font chooser dialog.
Since: 2.4
@@ -21841,7 +30614,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> a string containing the font selection dialog title
+<parameter_description> a string containing the font chooser dialog title
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21888,12 +30661,320 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_dialog_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkFontChooserDialog.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> Title of the dialog, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkFontChooserDialog
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_get_font">
+<description>
+Gets the currently-selected font name.
+
+Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
+gtk_font_chooser_set_font(), as the font chooser widget may
+normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
+structure. For example, "Helvetica Italic Bold 12" could be
+normalized to "Helvetica Bold Italic 12".
+
+Use pango_font_description_equal() if you want to compare two
+font descriptions.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A string with the name
+of the current font, or %NULL if no font is selected. You must
+free this string with g_free().
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_get_font_desc">
+<description>
+Gets the currently-selected font.
+
+Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
+gtk_font_chooser_set_font(), as the font chooser widget may
+normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
+structure. For example, "Helvetica Italic Bold 12" could be
+normalized to "Helvetica Bold Italic 12".
+
+Use pango_font_description_equal() if you want to compare two
+font descriptions.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #PangoFontDescription for the
+current font, or %NULL if no font is selected.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_get_font_face">
+<description>
+Gets the #PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
+details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
+
+If the selected font is not installed, returns %NULL.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #PangoFontFace representing the
+selected font group details, or %NULL. The returned object is owned by
+ fontchooser and must not be modified or freed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_get_font_family">
+<description>
+Gets the #PangoFontFamily representing the selected font family.
+Font families are a collection of font faces.
+
+If the selected font is not installed, returns %NULL.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #PangoFontFamily representing the
+selected font family, or %NULL. The returned object is owned by @fontchooser
+and must not be modified or freed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_get_font_size">
+<description>
+The selected font size.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A n integer representing the selected font size,
+or -1 if no font size is selected.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_get_preview_text">
+<description>
+Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the text displayed in the
+preview area
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_get_show_preview_entry">
+<description>
+Returns whether the preview entry is shown or not.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the preview entry is shown
+or %FALSE if it is hidden.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_set_filter_func">
+<description>
+Adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
+in the font chooser.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontFilterFunc, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @filter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_set_font">
+<description>
+Sets the currently-selected font.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fontname">
+<parameter_description> a font name like "Helvetica 12" or "Times Bold 18"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_set_font_desc">
+<description>
+Sets the currently-selected font from @font_desc.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="font_desc">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoFontDescription
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_set_preview_text">
+<description>
+Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
+The @text is used to show how the selected font looks.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_set_show_preview_entry">
+<description>
+Shows or hides the editable preview entry.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontchooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_preview_entry">
+<parameter_description> whether to show the editable preview entry or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_chooser_widget_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkFontChooserWidget.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkFontChooserWidget
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_cancel_button">
<description>
Gets the 'Cancel' button.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fsd">
@@ -21918,6 +30999,7 @@ structure. For example, "Helvetica Italic Bold 12" could be normalized
to "Helvetica Bold Italic 12". Use pango_font_description_equal()
if you want to compare two font descriptions.
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21928,6 +31010,7 @@ if you want to compare two font descriptions.
</parameters>
<return> A string with the name of the current font, or %NULL if no
font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -21937,6 +31020,8 @@ Retrieves the #GtkFontSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
Since: 2.22
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fsd">
@@ -21955,6 +31040,8 @@ Gets the 'OK' button.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fsd">
@@ -21972,6 +31059,7 @@ for the 'OK' button.
<description>
Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21983,6 +31071,7 @@ Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
This string is owned by the widget and should not be
modified or freed
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -21990,6 +31079,7 @@ modified or freed
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog.
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21999,6 +31089,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -22006,6 +31097,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog.
<description>
Sets the currently selected font.
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22020,6 +31112,7 @@ Sets the currently selected font.
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the font selected in @fsd is now the
@fontname specified, %FALSE otherwise.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -22027,6 +31120,8 @@ Sets the currently selected font.
<description>
Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fsd">
@@ -22048,6 +31143,8 @@ details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontsel">
@@ -22069,6 +31166,8 @@ the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontsel">
@@ -22087,6 +31186,8 @@ Gets the #PangoFontFamily representing the selected font family.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontsel">
@@ -22109,6 +31210,8 @@ example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontsel">
@@ -22132,6 +31235,7 @@ For example, "Helvetica Italic Bold 12" could be normalized to
"Helvetica Bold Italic 12". Use pango_font_description_equal()
if you want to compare two font descriptions.
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22142,6 +31246,7 @@ if you want to compare two font descriptions.
</parameters>
<return> A string with the name of the current font, or %NULL if
no font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -22151,6 +31256,8 @@ This returns the #GtkEntry used to display the font as a preview.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontsel">
@@ -22167,6 +31274,7 @@ Since: 2.14
<description>
Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22178,6 +31286,7 @@ Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
This string is owned by the widget and should not be
modified or freed
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -22187,6 +31296,8 @@ The selected font size.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontsel">
@@ -22207,6 +31318,8 @@ number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontsel">
@@ -22225,6 +31338,8 @@ This returns the #GtkTreeeView used to list font sizes.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontsel">
@@ -22257,6 +31372,7 @@ Note that the @fontsel needs to know the screen in which it will appear
for this to work; this can be guaranteed by simply making sure that the
@fontsel is inserted in a toplevel window before you call this function.
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22272,6 +31388,7 @@ for this to work; this can be guaranteed by simply making sure that the
<return> %TRUE if the font could be set successfully; %FALSE if no
such font exists or if the @fontsel doesn't belong to a particular
screen yet.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -22280,6 +31397,8 @@ screen yet.
Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
The @text is used to show how the selected font looks.
+Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="fontsel">
@@ -22986,7 +32105,12 @@ number of 'cells' that @child will occupy is determined by
Adds a widget to the grid.
The widget is placed next to @sibling, on the side determined by
- side
+ side When @sibling is %NULL, the widget is placed in row (for
+left or right placement) or column 0 (for top or bottom placement),
+at the end indicated by @side.
+
+Attaching widgets labeled [1], [2], [3] with @sibling == %NULL and
+ side == %GTK_POS_LEFT yields a layout of [3][2][1].
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22999,7 +32123,8 @@ The widget is placed next to @sibling, on the side determined by
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description> the child of @grid that @child will be placed next to
+<parameter_description> the child of @grid that @child will be placed
+next to, or %NULL to place @child at the beginning or end
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="side">
@@ -23018,6 +32143,33 @@ The widget is placed next to @sibling, on the side determined by
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_grid_get_child_at">
+<description>
+Gets the child of @grid whose area covers the grid
+cell whose upper left corner is at @left, @top.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="grid">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkGrid
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> the left edge of the cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> the top edge of the cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the child at the given position, or %NULL
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_grid_get_column_homogeneous">
<description>
Returns whether all columns of @grid have the same width.
@@ -23082,6 +32234,84 @@ Returns the amount of space between the rows of @grid.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_grid_insert_column">
+<description>
+Inserts a column at the specified position.
+
+Children which are attached at or to the right of this position
+are moved one column to the right. Children which span across this
+position are grown to span the new column.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="grid">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkGrid
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position to insert the column at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_grid_insert_next_to">
+<description>
+Inserts a row or column at the specified position.
+
+The new row or column is placed next to @sibling, on the side
+determined by @side. If @side is %GTK_POS_TOP or %GTK_POS_BOTTOM,
+a row is inserted. If @side is %GTK_POS_LEFT of %GTK_POS_RIGHT,
+a column is inserted.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="grid">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkGrid
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> the child of @grid that the new row or column will be
+placed next to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="side">
+<parameter_description> the side of @sibling that @child is positioned next to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_grid_insert_row">
+<description>
+Inserts a row at the specified position.
+
+Children which are attached at or below this position
+are moved one row down. Children which span across this
+position are grown to span the new row.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="grid">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkGrid
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position to insert the row at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_grid_new">
<description>
Creates a new grid widget.
@@ -23172,6 +32402,8 @@ Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="handle_box">
@@ -23189,6 +32421,7 @@ Since: 2.14
Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23198,6 +32431,7 @@ gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the current handle position.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -23206,6 +32440,7 @@ gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
Gets the type of shadow drawn around the handle box. See
gtk_handle_box_set_shadow_type().
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23215,6 +32450,7 @@ gtk_handle_box_set_shadow_type().
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the type of shadow currently drawn around the handle box.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -23223,6 +32459,7 @@ gtk_handle_box_set_shadow_type().
Gets the edge used for determining reattachment of the handle box.
See gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge().
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23234,6 +32471,7 @@ See gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge().
<return> the edge used for determining reattachment, or
(GtkPositionType)-1 if this is determined (as per default)
from the handle position.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -23241,11 +32479,13 @@ from the handle position.
<description>
Create a new handle box.
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkHandleBox.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -23253,6 +32493,8 @@ Create a new handle box.
<description>
Sets the side of the handlebox where the handle is drawn.
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="handle_box">
@@ -23272,6 +32514,8 @@ Sets the side of the handlebox where the handle is drawn.
Sets the type of shadow to be drawn around the border
of the handle box.
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="handle_box">
@@ -23302,6 +32546,8 @@ handle position is %GTK_POS_RIGHT or %GTK_POS_LEFT,
then the snap edge will be %GTK_POS_TOP, otherwise
it will be %GTK_POS_LEFT.
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="handle_box">
@@ -23323,7 +32569,7 @@ in the future.
Creates a new #GtkHBox.
Deprecated: 3.2: You can use gtk_box_new() with %GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL instead,
-wich is a very quick and easy change. But the recommendation is to switch to
+which is a quick and easy change. But the recommendation is to switch to
#GtkGrid, since #GtkBox is going to go away eventually.
See <xref linkend="gtk-migrating-GtkGrid"/>.
@@ -24457,6 +33703,7 @@ Looks up the icon size associated with @name.
Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
is statically allocated and should not be freed.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="size">
@@ -26134,8 +35381,7 @@ To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
To free the return value, use:
|[
-g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc)gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
-g_list_free (list);
+g_list_free_full (list, (GDestroyNotify) gtk_tree_patch_free);
]|
Since: 2.6
@@ -27705,10 +36951,11 @@ stock id to select the stock item for the item
<description>
Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem with an empty label.
+
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem
</return>
</function>
@@ -27724,6 +36971,7 @@ appropriate path for the menu item, use gtk_stock_lookup() to look up the
standard accelerator for the stock item, and if one is found, call
gtk_accel_map_add_entry() to register it.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="stock_id">
@@ -27744,6 +36992,7 @@ accelerator to, or %NULL.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing a label.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="label">
@@ -27761,6 +37010,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing a label. The label
will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="label">
@@ -28034,6 +37284,39 @@ you should use gtk_image_new_from_icon_set().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_resource">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkImage displaying the resource file @resource_path. If the file
+isn't found or can't be loaded, the resulting #GtkImage will
+display a "broken image" icon. This function never returns %NULL,
+it always returns a valid #GtkImage widget.
+
+If the file contains an animation, the image will contain an
+animation.
+
+If you need to detect failures to load the file, use
+gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file() to load the file yourself, then create
+the #GtkImage from the pixbuf. (Or for animations, use
+gdk_pixbuf_animation_new_from_file()).
+
+The storage type (gtk_image_get_storage_type()) of the returned
+image is not defined, it will be whatever is appropriate for
+displaying the file.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="resource_path">
+<parameter_description> a resource path
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkImage
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_stock">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying a stock icon. Sample stock icon
@@ -28184,6 +37467,24 @@ See gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_resource">
+<description>
+See gtk_image_new_from_resource() for details.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resource_path">
+<parameter_description> a resource path or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_stock">
<description>
See gtk_image_new_from_stock() for details.
@@ -28725,6 +38026,8 @@ Destroys a key hash created with gtk_key_hash_new()
Installs a key snooper function, which will get called on all
key events before delivering them normally.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Key snooping should not be done. Events should
+be handled by widgets.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28739,6 +38042,7 @@ key events before delivering them normally.
</parameters>
<return> a unique id for this key snooper for use with
gtk_key_snooper_remove().
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -28746,6 +38050,9 @@ gtk_key_snooper_remove().
<description>
Removes the key snooper function with the given id.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Key snooping should not be done. Events should
+be handled by widgets.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="snooper_handler_id">
@@ -30196,14 +39503,14 @@ values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_with_values">
<description>
-Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this new
-row. If @position is larger than the number of rows on the list, then the
-new row will be appended to the list. The row will be filled with the
-values given to this function.
+Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this new
+row. If @position is larger than the number of rows on the list, then the
+new row will be appended to the list. The row will be filled with the
+values given to this function.
Calling
-<literal>gtk_list_store_insert_with_values(list_store, iter, position...)</literal>
-has the same effect as calling
+<literal>gtk_list_store_insert_with_values (list_store, iter, position...)</literal>
+has the same effect as calling
|[
gtk_list_store_insert (list_store, iter, position);
gtk_list_store_set (list_store, iter, ...);
@@ -30211,7 +39518,7 @@ gtk_list_store_set (list_store, iter, ...);
with the difference that the former will only emit a row_inserted signal,
while the latter will emit row_inserted, row_changed and, if the list store
is sorted, rows_reordered. Since emitting the rows_reordered signal
-repeatedly can affect the performance of the program,
+repeatedly can affect the performance of the program,
gtk_list_store_insert_with_values() should generally be preferred when
inserting rows in a sorted list store.
@@ -30224,7 +39531,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
@@ -30358,8 +39665,8 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gtk_list_store_new">
<description>
Creates a new list store as with @n_columns columns each of the types passed
-in. Note that only types derived from standard GObject fundamental types
-are supported.
+in. Note that only types derived from standard GObject fundamental types
+are supported.
As an example, <literal>gtk_tree_store_new (3, G_TYPE_INT, G_TYPE_STRING,
GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);</literal> will create a new #GtkListStore with three columns, of type
@@ -30951,6 +40258,30 @@ Creates a new #GtkMenuBar
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_bar_new_from_model">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkMenuBar and populates it with menu items
+and submenus according to @model.
+
+The created menu items are connected to actions found in the
+#GtkApplicationWindow to which the menu bar belongs - typically
+by means of being contained within the #GtkApplicationWindows
+widget hierarchy.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a #GMenuModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkMenuBar
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction">
<description>
Sets how widgets should be packed inside the children of a menubar.
@@ -31576,6 +40907,30 @@ Creates a new #GtkMenu
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_new_from_model">
+<description>
+Creates a #GtkMenu and populates it with menu items and
+submenus according to @model.
+
+The created menu items are connected to actions found in the
+#GtkApplicationWindow to which the menu belongs - typically
+by means of being attached to a widget (see gtk_menu_attach_to_widget())
+that is contained within the #GtkApplicationWindows widget hierarchy.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a #GMenuModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkMenu
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_popdown">
<description>
Removes the menu from the screen.
@@ -32361,15 +41716,15 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
-printf()-style), which is marked up with the
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
+printf()-style), which is marked up with the
<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
-like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
+like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
to escape it.
@@ -32390,7 +41745,7 @@ Since: 2.6
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
+<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -32404,7 +41759,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format
(with printf()-style).
Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
@@ -32545,7 +41900,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="flags">
@@ -33112,6 +42467,8 @@ Returns the horizontal width of a tab border.
Since: 2.22
+Deprecated: 3.4: this function returns zero
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="notebook">
@@ -33214,6 +42571,8 @@ Returns the vertical width of a tab border.
Since: 2.22
+Deprecated: 3.4: this function returns zero
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="notebook">
@@ -34823,7 +44182,7 @@ or %NULL to use the default name "Page Setup"
<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_get_page_setup">
<description>
-Gets the currently selected page setup from the dialog.
+Gets the currently selected page setup from the dialog.
Since: 2.10
@@ -34834,7 +44193,7 @@ Since: 2.10
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current page setup
+<return> the current page setup
</return>
</function>
@@ -41115,7 +50474,7 @@ Since: 2.12
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_ellipsize">
<description>
-Returns the ellipsizing position of the progressbar.
+Returns the ellipsizing position of the progress bar.
See gtk_progress_bar_set_ellipsize().
Since: 2.6
@@ -41150,7 +50509,7 @@ Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_inverted">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_progress_bar_set_inverted()
+Gets the value set by gtk_progress_bar_set_inverted().
</description>
@@ -41166,7 +50525,7 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_progress_bar_set_inverted()
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_pulse_step">
<description>
-Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()
+Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step().
</description>
@@ -41182,7 +50541,7 @@ Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_show_text">
<description>
-Gets the value of the #GtkProgressBar::show-text property.
+Gets the value of the #GtkProgressBar:show-text property.
See gtk_progress_bar_set_show_text().
Since: 3.0
@@ -41233,7 +50592,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkProgressBar.
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_pulse">
<description>
-Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
+Indicates that some progress has been made, but you don't know how much.
Causes the progress bar to enter "activity mode," where a block
bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse()
causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement
@@ -41276,7 +50635,6 @@ Causes the progress bar to "fill in" the given fraction
of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
inclusive.
-
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="pbar">
@@ -41331,10 +50689,14 @@ bouncing block for each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse().
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_show_text">
<description>
-Sets whether the progressbar will show text superimposed
+Sets whether the progress bar will show text superimposed
over the bar. The shown text is either the value of
-the #GtkProgressBar::text property or, if that is %NULL,
-the #GtkProgressBar::fraction value, as a percentage.
+the #GtkProgressBar:text property or, if that is %NULL,
+the #GtkProgressBar:fraction value, as a percentage.
+
+To make a progress bar that is styled and sized suitably for containing
+text (even if the actual text is blank), set #GtkProgressBar:show-text to
+%TRUE and #GtkProgressBar:text to the empty string (not %NULL).
Since: 3.0
@@ -41356,6 +50718,14 @@ Since: 3.0
<description>
Causes the given @text to appear superimposed on the progress bar.
+If @text is %NULL and #GtkProgressBar:show-text is %TRUE, the current
+value of #GtkProgressBar:fraction will be displayed as a percentage.
+
+If @text is non-%NULL and #GtkProgressBar:show-text is %TRUE, the text will
+be displayed. In this case, it will not display the progress percentage.
+If @text is the empty string, the progress bar will still be styled and sized
+suitably for containing text, as long as #GtkProgressBar:show-text is %TRUE.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="pbar">
@@ -41882,6 +51252,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem containing a label. The label
will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="group">
@@ -41970,7 +51341,8 @@ Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> An existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group
+<parameter_description> An
+existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41990,7 +51362,8 @@ Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> an existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are creating a new group
+<parameter_description> an existing radio button group, or %NULL if you are
+creating a new group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
@@ -42012,7 +51385,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioToolButton
+<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioToolButton, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42761,6 +52134,7 @@ Deprecated: 3.0: Use #GtkCssProvider instead.
</parameters>
<return> a newly-allocated string containing the
name of the file listing the IM modules available for loading
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -42779,6 +52153,7 @@ Deprecated: 3.0: Use #GtkCssProvider instead.
</parameters>
<return> a newly-allocated string containing the
path in which to look for IM modules.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -45410,7 +54785,7 @@ Since: 3.0
Renders an arrow pointing to @angle.
<example>
-<title>Typical arrow rendering at 0, 1/2 Π, Π and 3/2 Π</title>
+<title>Typical arrow rendering at 0, 1/2 ∏, ∏ and 3/2 ∏</title>
<inlinegraphic fileref="arrows.png" format="PNG"/>
</example>
@@ -45431,11 +54806,11 @@ Since: 3.0
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> Center X for the render area
+<parameter_description> X origin of the render area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> Center Y for the render area
+<parameter_description> Y origin of the render area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
@@ -45870,6 +55245,46 @@ means render at the size of the source and don't scale.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_render_insertion_cursor">
+<description>
+Draws a text caret on @cr at the specified index of @layout.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyleContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cr">
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_t
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> Y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> the #PangoLayout of the text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index">
+<parameter_description> the index in the #PangoLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> the #PangoDirection of the text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_render_layout">
<description>
Renders @layout on the coordinates @x, @y
@@ -46395,6 +55810,24 @@ next to the slider.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_has_origin">
+<description>
+Returns whether the scale has an origin.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the scale has an origin.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_scale_get_layout">
<description>
Gets the #PangoLayout used to display the scale. The returned
@@ -46563,6 +55996,29 @@ to the slider.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_set_has_origin">
+<description>
+If @has_origin is set to %TRUE (the default),
+the scale will highlight the part of the scale
+between the origin (bottom or left side) of the scale
+and the current value.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_origin">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the scale has an origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_scale_set_value_pos">
<description>
Sets the position in which the current value is displayed.
@@ -47948,7 +57404,7 @@ Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="psepc">
+<parameter name="pspec">
<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -48766,6 +58222,9 @@ into the spin button.
<description>
Sets the minimum and maximum allowable values for @spin_button.
+If the current value is outside this range, it will be adjusted
+to fit within the range, otherwise it will remain unchanged.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="spin_button">
@@ -50043,14 +59502,10 @@ Deprecated:3.0: Use #GtkStyleContext instead
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cr">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="set_bg">
+<parameter name="window">
<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -50523,6 +59978,25 @@ Since: 3.0
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_context_get_parent">
+<description>
+Gets the parent context set via gtk_style_context_set_parent().
+See that function for details.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyleContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the parent context or %NULL
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_style_context_get_path">
<description>
Returns the widget path used for style matching.
@@ -50588,6 +60062,37 @@ Returns the #GdkScreen to which @context is attached.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_context_get_section">
+<description>
+Queries the location in the CSS where @property was defined for the
+current @context. Note that the state to be queried is taken from
+gtk_style_context_get_state().
+
+If the location is not available, %NULL will be returned. The
+location might not be available for various reasons, such as the
+property being overridden, @property not naming a supported CSS
+property or tracking of definitions being disabled for performance
+reasons.
+
+Shorthand CSS properties cannot be queried for a location and will
+always return %NULL.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyleContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property">
+<parameter_description> style property name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %NULL or the section where value was defined
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_style_context_get_state">
<description>
Returns the state used when rendering.
@@ -51240,6 +60745,32 @@ other elements
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_context_set_parent">
+<description>
+Sets the parent style context for @context. The parent style
+context is used to implement
+<ulink url="http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-cascade/#inheritance">inheritance</ulink>
+of properties.
+
+If you are using a #GtkStyleContext returned from
+gtk_widget_get_style_context(), the parent will be set for you.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyleContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> the new parent or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_style_context_set_path">
<description>
Sets the #GtkWidgetPath used for style matching. As a
@@ -51558,6 +61089,7 @@ Deprecated: 3.0: Use #GtkStyleContext
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkStyle.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -52213,6 +61745,33 @@ Since: 3.0
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_symbolic_color_new_win32">
+<description>
+Creates a symbolic color based on the current win32
+theme.
+
+Note that while this call is available on all platforms
+the actual value returned is not reliable on non-win32
+platforms.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="theme_class">
+<parameter_description> The theme class to pull color from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="id">
+<parameter_description> The color id
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly created #GtkSymbolicColor
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_symbolic_color_ref">
<description>
Increases the reference count of @color
@@ -52319,6 +61878,9 @@ xpadding, ypadding);
</programlisting></informalexample>
If you want to make the button span the entire bottom row, use @left_attach == 0 and @right_attach = 2 instead.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_attach() with #GtkGrid. Note that the attach
+arguments differ between those two functions.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
@@ -52372,6 +61934,9 @@ function provides the programmer with a means to add children to a table with
identical padding and expansion options. The values used for the #GtkAttachOptions
are <literal>GTK_EXPAND | GTK_FILL</literal>, and the padding is set to 0.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_attach() with #GtkGrid. Note that the attach
+arguments differ between those two functions.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
@@ -52407,6 +61972,8 @@ are <literal>GTK_EXPAND | GTK_FILL</literal>, and the padding is set
Gets the amount of space between column @col, and
column @col + 1. See gtk_table_set_col_spacing().
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkGrid does not offer a replacement for this
+functionality.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52420,6 +61987,7 @@ column @col + 1. See gtk_table_set_col_spacing().
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the column spacing
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -52429,6 +61997,7 @@ Gets the default column spacing for the table. This is
the spacing that will be used for newly added columns.
(See gtk_table_set_col_spacings())
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_get_column_spacing() with #GtkGrid.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52438,6 +62007,7 @@ the spacing that will be used for newly added columns.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the default column spacing
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -52447,6 +62017,7 @@ Gets the default row spacing for the table. This is
the spacing that will be used for newly added rows.
(See gtk_table_set_row_spacings())
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_get_row_spacing() with #GtkGrid.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52456,6 +62027,7 @@ the spacing that will be used for newly added rows.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the default row spacing
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -52464,6 +62036,8 @@ the spacing that will be used for newly added rows.
Returns whether the table cells are all constrained to the same
width and height. (See gtk_table_set_homogenous ())
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_get_row_homogeneous() and
+gtk_grid_get_column_homogeneous() with #GtkGrid.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52473,6 +62047,7 @@ width and height. (See gtk_table_set_homogenous ())
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the cells are all constrained to the same size
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -52481,6 +62056,8 @@ width and height. (See gtk_table_set_homogenous ())
Gets the amount of space between row @row, and
row @row + 1. See gtk_table_set_row_spacing().
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkGrid does not offer a replacement for this
+functionality.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52494,6 +62071,7 @@ row @row + 1. See gtk_table_set_row_spacing().
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the row spacing
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -52503,6 +62081,9 @@ Gets the number of rows and columns in the table.
Since: 2.22
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkGrid does not expose the number of columns and
+rows.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
@@ -52531,6 +62112,7 @@ this can be changed later with gtk_table_resize(). @rows and @columns
must both be in the range 1 .. 65535. For historical reasons, 0 is accepted
as well and is silently interpreted as 1.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_new().
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -52549,6 +62131,7 @@ the cell containing the largest widget.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A pointer to the the newly created table widget.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -52557,6 +62140,8 @@ the cell containing the largest widget.
If you need to change a table's size <emphasis>after</emphasis>
it has been created, this function allows you to do so.
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkGrid resizes automatically.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
@@ -52580,6 +62165,10 @@ it has been created, this function allows you to do so.
Alters the amount of space between a given table column and the following
column.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_widget_set_margin_left() and
+gtk_widget_set_margin_right() on the widgets contained in the row if
+you need this functionality. #GtkGrid does not support per-row spacing.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
@@ -52602,6 +62191,8 @@ column.
<description>
Sets the space between every column in @table equal to @spacing.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_set_column_spacing() with #GtkGrid.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
@@ -52622,6 +62213,9 @@ in the table.
Changes the homogenous property of table cells, ie. whether all cells are
an equal size or not.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_set_row_homogeneous() and
+gtk_grid_set_column_homogeneous() with #GtkGrid.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
@@ -52641,6 +62235,10 @@ to %FALSE if this is not your desired behaviour.
<description>
Changes the space between a given table row and the subsequent row.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_widget_set_margin_top() and
+gtk_widget_set_margin_bottom() on the widgets contained in the row if
+you need this functionality. #GtkGrid does not support per-row spacing.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
@@ -52663,6 +62261,8 @@ Changes the space between a given table row and the subsequent row.
<description>
Sets the space between every row in @table equal to @spacing.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_set_row_spacing() with #GtkGrid.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="table">
@@ -53131,11 +62731,14 @@ otherwise %FALSE.
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTearoffMenuItem.
+Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkTearoffMenuItem is deprecated and should not be
+used in newly written code.
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
<return> a new #GtkTearoffMenuItem.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -53370,6 +62973,7 @@ Since: 2.14
</parameters>
<return>
0-terminated array of type ids
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -55049,7 +64653,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags">
<description>
Inserts @text into @buffer at @iter, applying the list of tags to
-the newly-inserted text. The last tag specified must be NULL to
+the newly-inserted text. The last tag specified must be %NULL to
terminate the list. Equivalent to calling gtk_text_buffer_insert(),
then gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag() on the inserted text;
gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags() is just a convenience function.
@@ -55077,7 +64681,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags() is just a convenience function.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> NULL-terminated list of tags to apply
+<parameter_description> %NULL-terminated list of tags to apply
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55724,6 +65328,29 @@ convenience function gtk_text_buffer_create_child_anchor().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_assign">
+<description>
+Assigns the value of @other to @iter. This function
+is not useful in applications, because iterators can be assigned
+with <literal>GtkTextIter i = j;</literal>. The
+function is used by language bindings.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="other">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_char">
<description>
Moves backward by one character offset. Returns %TRUE if movement
@@ -61017,6 +70644,7 @@ Creates a new #GtkToggleButton containing a label. The label
will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
in @label indicate the mnemonic for the button.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="label">
@@ -61314,7 +70942,7 @@ mnemonics on menu items on the overflow menu.
<function name="gtk_tool_button_new">
<description>
-Creates a new %GtkToolButton using @icon_widget as icon and @label as
+Creates a new %GtkToolButton using @icon_widget as contents and @label as
label.
Since: 2.4
@@ -61326,7 +70954,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc widget that will be used as icon widget, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a widget that will be used as the button contents, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -64275,7 +73903,8 @@ of the @tree_model.
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter">
<description>
-Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
+Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path. If @path does
+not exist, @iter is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
</description>
@@ -64656,9 +74285,11 @@ primarily for performance reasons.
This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
-whether or not to cache that node). For example, a file-system
-based model would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in
-memory, just the sections that are currently being displayed by
+whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
+is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
+visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
+would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
+just the sections that are currently being displayed by
every current view.
A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
@@ -64708,6 +74339,9 @@ This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
The location pointed to by @path should be the location that
the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
+Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
+outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tree_model">
@@ -65114,7 +74748,7 @@ Moves @path to point to the first child of the current path.
<function name="gtk_tree_path_free">
<description>
-Frees @path.
+Frees @path. If @path is %NULL, it simply returns.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -65271,7 +74905,7 @@ Since: 2.2
<parameter_description> first integer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="varargs">
+<parameter name="Varargs">
<parameter_description> list of integers terminated by -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -65706,8 +75340,7 @@ To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
To free the return value, use:
|[
-g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc) gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
-g_list_free (list);
+g_list_free_full (list, (GDestroyNotify) gtk_tree_path_free);
]|
Since: 2.2
@@ -66356,9 +75989,9 @@ gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values">
<description>
-Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this
-new row. If @position is larger than the number of rows on the list, then
-the new row will be appended to the list. The row will be filled with
+Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this
+new row. If @position is larger than the number of rows on the list, then
+the new row will be appended to the list. The row will be filled with
the values given to this function.
Calling
@@ -66573,8 +76206,8 @@ Since: 2.2
<function name="gtk_tree_store_new">
<description>
Creates a new tree store as with @n_columns columns each of the types passed
-in. Note that only types derived from standard GObject fundamental types
-are supported.
+in. Note that only types derived from standard GObject fundamental types
+are supported.
As an example, <literal>gtk_tree_store_new (3, G_TYPE_INT, G_TYPE_STRING,
GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);</literal> will create a new #GtkTreeStore with three columns, of type
@@ -66696,9 +76329,9 @@ i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
<description>
Sets the value of one or more cells in the row referenced by @iter.
The variable argument list should contain integer column numbers,
-each column number followed by the value to be set.
+each column number followed by the value to be set.
The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
-%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write
+%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write
<literal>gtk_tree_store_set (store, iter, 0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
The value will be referenced by the store if it is a %G_TYPE_OBJECT, and it
@@ -67565,8 +77198,8 @@ Since: 3.0
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_attributes">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn with a number of default values. This is
-equivalent to calling gtk_tree_view_column_set_title(),
+Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn with a number of default values.
+This is equivalent to calling gtk_tree_view_column_set_title(),
gtk_tree_view_column_pack_start(), and
gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes() on the newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
@@ -67590,15 +77223,15 @@ NULL);
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> The title to set the header to.
+<parameter_description> The title to set the header to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
+<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -67701,7 +77334,7 @@ are removed, and replaced with the new attributes.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell_renderer">
@@ -67709,7 +77342,7 @@ are removed, and replaced with the new attributes.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -68837,6 +78470,24 @@ model is unset.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_n_columns">
+<description>
+Queries the number of columns in the given @tree_view.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The number of columns in the @tree_view
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_path_at_pos">
<description>
Finds the path at the point (@x, @y), relative to bin_window coordinates
@@ -69124,7 +78775,8 @@ Since: 2.12
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a
+#GtkTreeModel or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
@@ -69255,19 +78907,19 @@ property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position to insert the new column in.
+<parameter_description> The position to insert the new column in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> The title to set the header to.
+<parameter_description> The title to set the header to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer.
+<parameter_description> The #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -69732,6 +79384,8 @@ This function should almost never be used. It is meant for private use by
ATK for determining the number of visible children that are removed when the
user collapses a row, or a row is deleted.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Accessibility does not need the function anymore.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tree_view">
@@ -69757,6 +79411,7 @@ user collapses a row, or a row is deleted.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_drag_dest_row">
<description>
Sets the row that is highlighted for feedback.
+If @path is %NULL, an existing highlight is removed.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -69765,7 +79420,7 @@ Sets the row that is highlighted for feedback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The path of the row to highlight, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> The path of the row to highlight, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pos">
@@ -69967,7 +79622,7 @@ Since: 2.6
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection">
<description>
-Enables of disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
+Enables or disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
Currently, this works only for the selection modes
%GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE and %GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE.
@@ -70035,8 +79690,8 @@ then it will unset the old model.
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
<description>
This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
-models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
-#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
+models that support the #GtkTreeDragSourceIface and the
+#GtkTreeDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
@@ -70552,6 +80207,35 @@ the return value is 0.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_resource">
+<description>
+Parses a resource file containing a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> and
+merges it with the current contents of @manager.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resource_path">
+<parameter_description> the resource path of the file to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used
+to unmerge the UI with gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui(). If an error occurred,
+the return value is 0.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_string">
<description>
Parses a string containing a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> and
@@ -70685,6 +80369,9 @@ will have tearoff menu items.
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 3.4: Tearoff menus are deprecated and should not
+be used in newly written code.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="manager">
@@ -70886,6 +80573,9 @@ menus never have tearoff menu items.
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 3.4: Tearoff menus are deprecated and should not
+be used in newly written code.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="manager">
@@ -70905,7 +80595,7 @@ Since: 2.4
Creates a new #GtkVBox.
Deprecated: 3.2: You can use gtk_box_new() with %GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL instead,
-wich is a very quick and easy change. But the recommendation is to switch to
+which is a quick and easy change. But the recommendation is to switch to
#GtkGrid, since #GtkBox is going to go away eventually.
See <xref linkend="gtk-migrating-GtkGrid"/>.
@@ -71036,15 +80726,15 @@ Creates a new #GtkViewport with the given adjustments.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hadjustment">
-<parameter_description> horizontal adjustment.
+<parameter_description> horizontal adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="vadjustment">
-<parameter_description> vertical adjustment.
+<parameter_description> vertical adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkViewport.
+<return> a new #GtkViewport
</return>
</function>
@@ -71458,6 +81148,7 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameters>
<return> the #GParamSpec of the style property or
%NULL if @class has no style property with that name.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -71519,9 +81210,10 @@ Since: 2.2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an
+<return> a
newly allocated array of #GParamSpec*. The array must be
freed with g_free().
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -71922,12 +81614,11 @@ This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify() for child properties.
Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
assistive technology.
-If no accessibility library is loaded (i.e. no ATK implementation library is
-loaded via <envar>GTK_MODULES</envar> or via another application library,
-such as libgnome), then this #AtkObject instance may be a no-op. Likewise,
-if no class-specific #AtkObject implementation is available for the widget
-instance in question, it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the
-first ancestor class for which such an implementation is defined.
+If accessibility support is not available, this #AtkObject
+instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific #AtkObject
+implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
+it will inherit an #AtkObject implementation from the first ancestor
+class for which such an implementation is defined.
The documentation of the
<ulink url="http://library.gnome.org/devel/atk/stable/">ATK</ulink>
@@ -72565,6 +82256,31 @@ Since: 3.0
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_modifier_mask">
+<description>
+Returns the modifier mask the @widget's windowing system backend
+uses for a particular purpose.
+
+See gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask().
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="intent">
+<parameter_description> the use case for the modifier mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the modifier mask used for @intent.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_modifier_style">
<description>
Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by
@@ -72719,6 +82435,8 @@ defined as @widget->window coordinates for widgets that are not
#GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets, and are relative to @widget->allocation.x,
@widget->allocation.y for widgets that are #GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets.
+Deprecated: 3.4: Use gdk_window_get_device_position() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -73573,6 +83291,32 @@ with the widget.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_has_visible_focus">
+<description>
+Determines if the widget should show a visible indication that
+it has the global input focus. This is a convenience function for
+use in ::draw handlers that takes into account whether focus
+indication should currently be shown in the toplevel window of
+ widget See gtk_window_get_focus_visible() for more information
+about focus indication.
+
+To find out if the widget has the global input focus, use
+gtk_widget_has_focus().
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget should display a 'focus rectangle'
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
<description>
Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
@@ -75455,6 +85199,7 @@ Computes the intersection of a @widget's area and @region, returning
the intersection. The result may be empty, use cairo_region_is_empty() to
check.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -75470,10 +85215,9 @@ of @widget->window for widgets with their own window.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A newly allocated region holding the intersection of @widget
-and @region. The coordinates of the return value are
-relative to @widget->window for %NO_WINDOW widgets, and
-relative to the parent window of @widget->window for
-widgets with their own window.
+and @region. The coordinates of the return value are relative to
+ widget->window for %NO_WINDOW widgets, and relative to the parent
+window of @widget->window for widgets with their own window.
</return>
</function>
@@ -75482,6 +85226,7 @@ widgets with their own window.
Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -75501,7 +85246,7 @@ gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
+<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
</return>
</function>
@@ -77112,8 +86857,8 @@ Gets the values of a multiple style properties of @widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> pairs of property names and locations to
-return the property values, starting with the location for
+<parameter_description> pairs of property names and locations to return the
+property values, starting with the location for
@first_property_name, terminated by %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -77572,6 +87317,26 @@ Since: 3.0
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_get_attached_to">
+<description>
+Fetches the attach widget for this window. See
+gtk_window_set_attached_to().
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the widget where the window is attached,
+or %NULL if the window is not attached to any widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_get_decorated">
<description>
Returns whether the window has been set to have decorations
@@ -77742,6 +87507,25 @@ mapped.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_visible">
+<description>
+Gets the value of the #GtkWindow:focus-visible property.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if 'focus rectangles' are supposed to be visible
+in this window.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_get_gravity">
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_gravity().
@@ -77796,6 +87580,26 @@ Since: 3.0
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_get_hide_titlebar_when_maximized">
+<description>
+Returns whether the window has requested to have its titlebar hidden
+when maximized. See gtk_window_set_hide_titlebar_when_maximized ().
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the window has requested to have its titlebar
+hidden when maximized
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_get_icon">
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_icon() (or if you've
@@ -78500,6 +88304,7 @@ on #GtkWidget.
<description>
Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
@@ -78511,11 +88316,11 @@ Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="modifier">
-<parameter_description> the modifiers
+<parameter_description> the modifiers
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the activation is done.
+<return> %TRUE if the activation is done.
</return>
</function>
@@ -78943,6 +88748,39 @@ Since: 3.0
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_attached_to">
+<description>
+Marks @window as attached to @attach_widget. This creates a logical binding
+between the window and the widget it belongs to, which is used by GTK+ to
+propagate information such as styling or accessibility to @window as if it
+was a children of @attach_widget.
+
+Examples of places where specifying this relation is useful are for instance
+a #GtkMenu created by a #GtkComboBox, a completion popup window
+created by #GtkEntry or a typeahead search entry created by #GtkTreeView.
+
+Note that this function should not be confused with
+gtk_window_set_transient_for(), which specifies a window manager relation
+between two toplevels instead.
+
+Passing %NULL for @attach_widget detaches the window.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="attach_widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_auto_startup_notification">
<description>
By default, after showing the first #GtkWindow, GTK+ calls
@@ -79270,6 +89108,26 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_focus_visible">
+<description>
+Sets the #GtkWindow:focus-visible property.
+
+Since: 3.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> the new value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_geometry_hints">
<description>
This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
@@ -79375,6 +89233,31 @@ Since: 3.0
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_hide_titlebar_when_maximized">
+<description>
+If @setting is %TRUE, then @window will request that it's titlebar
+should be hidden when maximized.
+This is useful for windows that don't convey any information other
+than the application name in the titlebar, to put the available
+screen space to better use. If the underlying window system does not
+support the request, the setting will not have any effect.
+
+Since: 3.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> whether to hide the titlebar when @window is maximized
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
<description>
Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
diff --git a/gtk/src/radioaction.hg b/gtk/src/radioaction.hg
index 02157e5..fad22a1 100644
--- a/gtk/src/radioaction.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/radioaction.hg
@@ -125,12 +125,6 @@ public:
#m4 _CONVERSION(`GtkRadioAction*',`const Glib::RefPtr<RadioAction>&',`Glib::wrap($3, true)')
- /** The changed signal is emitted on every member of a radio group when the
- * active member is changed. The signal is emitted after the activate signals
- * for the previous and current active members.
- *
- * @param current the member of this action's group which has just been activated.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void changed(const Glib::RefPtr<RadioAction>& current), changed)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("value", int)
diff --git a/gtk/src/range.hg b/gtk/src/range.hg
index 612d3fa..ef1483c 100644
--- a/gtk/src/range.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/range.hg
@@ -92,28 +92,6 @@ public:
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void value_changed(), "value_changed")
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void adjust_bounds(double new_value), "adjust_bounds")
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void move_slider(ScrollType scroll), "move_slider")
-
- /** The change_value signal is emitted when a scroll action is
- * performed on a range. It allows an application to determine the
- * type of scroll event that occurred and the resultant new value.
- * The application can handle the event itself and return true to
- * prevent further processing. Or, by returning false, it can pass
- * the event to other handlers until the default GTK+ handler is
- * reached.
- *
- * The value parameter is unrounded. An application that overrides
- * the change_value signal is responsible for clamping the value to
- * the desired number of decimal digits; the default handler
- * clamps the value based on range->round_digits.
- *
- * It is not possible to use delayed update policies in an overridden
- * change_value handler.
- *
- * @param scroll the type of scroll action that was performed.
- * @param new_value the new value resulting from the scroll action.
- * @result true to prevent other handlers from being invoked for the
- * signal, or false to propagate the signal further.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool change_value(ScrollType scroll, double new_value), "change_value")
_WRAP_PROPERTY("adjustment", Adjustment*)
diff --git a/gtk/src/recentchooser.hg b/gtk/src/recentchooser.hg
index 021b253..cddd5e8 100644
--- a/gtk/src/recentchooser.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/recentchooser.hg
@@ -127,18 +127,7 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(Glib::RefPtr<RecentFilter> get_filter(), gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter, refreturn)
_WRAP_METHOD(Glib::RefPtr<const RecentFilter> get_filter() const, gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter, refreturn, constversion)
- /** This signal is emitted when there is a change in the set of
- * selected recently used resources. This can happen when a user
- * modifies the selection with the mouse or the keyboard, or when
- * explicitely calling functions to change the selection.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void selection_changed(), "selection-changed")
-
- /** This signal is emitted when the user "activates" a recent item
- * in the recent chooser. This can happen by double-clicking on an item
- * in the recently used resources list, or by pressing
- * <keycap>Enter</keycap>.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void item_activated(), "item-activated")
//Not wrapped because it's write-only and construct-only: _WRAP_PROPERTY("recent-manager", Glib::RefPtr<RecentManager>)
diff --git a/gtk/src/recentmanager.hg b/gtk/src/recentmanager.hg
index 68104aa..7a8bf67 100644
--- a/gtk/src/recentmanager.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/recentmanager.hg
@@ -132,8 +132,6 @@ public:
/// For instance, void on_changed();
typedef sigc::slot<void> SlotChanged;
- /** The "changed" signal is emitted when an item in the recently used resources list is changed.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void changed(), "changed")
_WRAP_PROPERTY("filename", Glib::ustring)
diff --git a/gtk/src/scale.hg b/gtk/src/scale.hg
index 593bacd..fa8891f 100644
--- a/gtk/src/scale.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/scale.hg
@@ -102,12 +102,6 @@ public:
#m4 dnl//See bug http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=168747.
#m4 _CONVERSION(`Glib::ustring',`gchar*',`(strlen($3.c_str()) ? g_strdup($3.c_str()) : 0)')
- /** Determines how the value is formatted.
- *
- * This can be used to connect a custom function for determining how the
- * value is formatted. The function (or function object) is given a the value
- * as a double and should return the representation of it as a Glib::ustring.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(Glib::ustring format_value(double value), "format_value")
// TODO: When we can break ABI, this signal needs to be
// Glib::ustring format_value(double value, bool& use_default_formatting),
diff --git a/gtk/src/spinbutton.hg b/gtk/src/spinbutton.hg
index 1e2d974..9d6721f 100644
--- a/gtk/src/spinbutton.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/spinbutton.hg
@@ -95,25 +95,9 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void update(), gtk_spin_button_update)
- /** Convert the Entry text to a number.
- * The computed number should be written to <tt>*new_value</tt>.
- * @return
- * @li <tt>false</tt>: No conversion done, continue with default handler.
- * @li <tt>true</tt>: Conversion successful, don't call default handler.
- * @li <tt>Gtk::INPUT_ERROR</tt>: Conversion failed, don't call default handler.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(int input(double* new_value), "input")
-
- /** Convert the Adjustment position to text.
- * The computed text should be written via Gtk::Entry::set_text().
- * @return
- * @li <tt>false</tt>: No conversion done, continue with default handler.
- * @li <tt>true</tt>: Conversion successful, don't call default handler.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool output(), "output")
-
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void wrapped(), "wrapped")
-
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void value_changed(), "value_changed")
//Keybinding signals:
diff --git a/gtk/src/textbuffer.hg b/gtk/src/textbuffer.hg
index 7bc1cfd..c003616 100644
--- a/gtk/src/textbuffer.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/textbuffer.hg
@@ -532,19 +532,7 @@ _CONVERSION(`const char*',`const Glib::ustring&',`Glib::ustring(p1, p1 + p2)')
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void insert_pixbuf(const TextBuffer::iterator& pos, const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf>& pixbuf), "insert_pixbuf")
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void insert_child_anchor(const TextBuffer::iterator& pos, const Glib::RefPtr<ChildAnchor>& anchor), "insert_child_anchor")
- /** The delete_range signal is emitted to delete a range from
- * a TextBuffer. Note that your handler must not invalidate the
- * @a start and @a end iters (or has to revalidate them), if it runs before the
- * default handler. There is no need to keep the iters valid in handlers
- * which run after the default handler but
- * those don't have access to the deleted text.
- *
- * @param start the start of the range to be deleted.
- * @param end the end of the range to be deleted.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void erase(const TextBuffer::iterator& start, const TextBuffer::iterator& end), "delete_range")
-
-
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void changed(), "changed")
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void modified_changed(), "modified_changed")
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void mark_set(const TextBuffer::iterator& location, const Glib::RefPtr<TextBuffer::Mark>& mark), "mark_set")
diff --git a/gtk/src/togglebutton.hg b/gtk/src/togglebutton.hg
index 6d76b45..a2fba1f 100644
--- a/gtk/src/togglebutton.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/togglebutton.hg
@@ -70,8 +70,6 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void toggled(), gtk_toggle_button_toggled)
- /** Emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void toggled(), "toggled")
_WRAP_PROPERTY("active", bool)
diff --git a/gtk/src/toolbar.hg b/gtk/src/toolbar.hg
index 98b617d..70355e9 100644
--- a/gtk/src/toolbar.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/toolbar.hg
@@ -87,32 +87,8 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void set_drop_highlight_item(ToolItem& tool_item, int index), gtk_toolbar_set_drop_highlight_item)
void unset_drop_highlight_item();
- /** Emitted when the orientation of the toolbar changes.
- *
- * @param orientation The new Orientation of the toolbar.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void orientation_changed(Orientation orientation), "orientation_changed")
-
- /** Emitted when the style of the toolbar changes.
- *
- * @param @style The new ToolbarStyle of the toolbar.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void toolbar_style_changed(ToolbarStyle style), "style_changed")
-
- /** Emitted when the user right-clicks the toolbar or uses the
- * keybinding to display a popup menu.
- *
- * Application developers should handle this signal if they want
- * to display a context menu on the toolbar. The context-menu should
- * appear at the coordinates given by @a x and @a y. The mouse button
- * number is given by the @a button parameter. If the menu was popped
- * up using the keyboard, @a button is -1.
- *
- * @param x The x coordinate of the point where the menu should appear.
- * @param y The y coordinate of the point where the menu should appear.
- * @param button The mouse button the user pressed, or -1
- * @resultt true if the signal was handled, false if not.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool popup_context_menu(int x, int y, int button_number), "popup_context_menu")
_IGNORE_SIGNAL("move_focus")
diff --git a/gtk/src/toolbutton.hg b/gtk/src/toolbutton.hg
index 70b6422..15a325d 100644
--- a/gtk/src/toolbutton.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/toolbutton.hg
@@ -78,10 +78,6 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(const Widget* get_label_widget() const, gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget, constversion)
//TODO: We use this in toolbar.ccg. Check if it should really be deprecated.
- /** This signal is emitted when the tool button is clicked with the mouse
- * or activated with the keyboard.
- * @deprecated This is an "action" key-binding signal that you should rarely need to use.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void clicked(), "clicked")
_WRAP_PROPERTY("label", Glib::ustring)
diff --git a/gtk/src/toolitem.hg b/gtk/src/toolitem.hg
index 27ed56d..4b6112c 100644
--- a/gtk/src/toolitem.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/toolitem.hg
@@ -87,45 +87,8 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void toolbar_reconfigured(), gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured)
//TODO: This suggests calling set_proxy_menu_item() with NULL. but the function asserts against that.
- /** This signal is emitted when the toolbar needs information from @tool_item
- * about whether the item should appear in the toolbar overflow menu. In
- * response the tool item should either
- * <itemizedlist>
- * <listitem> call set_proxy_menu_item() with a NULL
- * pointer and return true to indicate that the item should not appear
- * in the overflow menu
- * </listitem>
- * <listitem> call set_proxy_menu_item() with a new menu
- * item and return true, or
- * </listitem>
- * <listitem> return false to indicate that the signal was not
- * handled by the item. This means that
- * the item will not appear in the overflow menu unless a later handler
- * installs a menu item.
- * </listitem>
- * </itemizedlist>
- *
- * The toolbar may cache the result of this signal. When the tool item changes
- * how it will respond to this signal it must call rebuild_menu()
- * to invalidate the cache and ensure that the toolbar rebuilds its overflow
- * menu.
- *
- * @result true if the signal was handled, false if not
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool create_menu_proxy(), create_menu_proxy)
- /** This signal is emitted when some property of the toolbar that the
- * item is a child of changes. For custom subclasses of ToolItem,
- * the default handler of this signal use the functions
- * <itemizedlist>
- * <listitem>Toolbar::get_orientation()</listitem>
- * <listitem>Toolbar::get_style()</listitem>
- * <listitem>Toolbar::get_icon_size()</listitem>
- * <listitem>Toolbar::get_relief_style()</listitem>
- * </itemizedlist>
- * to find out what the toolbar should look like and change
- * themselves accordingly.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void toolbar_reconfigured(), toolbar_reconfigured)
//_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool set_tooltip(Tooltips* tooltips, const Glib::ustring& tip_text, const Glib::ustring& tip_private), set_tooltip, deprecated) //TODO: Implement deprecated for _WRAP_SIGNAL() to avoid hand-coding this:
diff --git a/gtk/src/uimanager.hg b/gtk/src/uimanager.hg
index 6f4f6a1..3006a5d 100644
--- a/gtk/src/uimanager.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/uimanager.hg
@@ -254,57 +254,11 @@ public:
_WRAP_METHOD(void ensure_update(), gtk_ui_manager_ensure_update)
_WRAP_METHOD(ui_merge_id new_merge_id(), gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id)
- /** The add_widget signal is emitted for each generated menubar and toolbar.
- * It is not emitted for generated popup menus, which can be obtained by
- * get_widget().
- *
- * @param widget the added widget
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void add_widget(Widget* widget), add_widget)
-
- /** The "actions-changed" signal is emitted whenever the set of actions
- * changes.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void actions_changed(), actions_changed)
-
- /** The connect_proxy signal is emitted after connecting a proxy to
- * an action in the group.
- *
- * This is intended for simple customizations for which a custom action
- * class would be too clumsy, e.g. showing tooltips for menuitems in the
- * statusbar.
- *
- * @param action the action
- * @param widget the proxy
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void connect_proxy(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action, Widget* widget), connect_proxy)
-
- /** The disconnect_proxy signal is emitted after disconnecting a proxy
- * from an action in the group.
- *
- * @param action the action
- * @param widget the proxy
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void disconnect_proxy(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action, Widget* widget), disconnect_proxy)
-
- /** The pre_activate signal is emitted just before the @a action
- * is activated.
- *
- * This is intended for applications to get notification
- * just before any action is activated.
- *
- * @param action the action
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void pre_activate(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action), pre_activate)
-
- /** The post_activate signal is emitted just after the @a action
- * is activated.
- *
- * This is intended for applications to get notification
- * just after any action is activated.
- *
- * @param action the action
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void post_activate(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action), post_activate)
_WRAP_PROPERTY("add_tearoffs", bool)
diff --git a/gtk/src/widget.hg b/gtk/src/widget.hg
index 259240b..90c330a 100644
--- a/gtk/src/widget.hg
+++ b/gtk/src/widget.hg
@@ -579,11 +579,6 @@ public:
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void grab_notify(bool was_grabbed), "grab_notify")
- /** The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each child property that has
- * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
- *
- * @param pspec The GParamSpec of the changed child property.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void child_notify(GParamSpec* pspec), "child_notify")
//_WRAP_SIGNAL(void add_accelerator(guint, GtkAccelGroup*, guint accel_key, Gdk::ModifierType, AccelFlags), "add-accelerator")
@@ -605,14 +600,6 @@ public:
/// Event triggered by user moving pointer.
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool motion_notify_event(GdkEventMotion* event), "motion_notify_event")
- /** The delete_event signal is emitted if a user requests that
- * a toplevel window is closed. The default handler for this signal
- * hides the window.
- *
- * @param event the event which triggered this signal.
- * @result true to stop other handlers from being invoked for the event,
- * or false to propagate the event. further.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool delete_event(GdkEventAny* event), "delete_event")
#m4begin
@@ -664,112 +651,14 @@ dnl
#m4 _CONVERSION(`GdkDragContext*',`const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>&',Glib::wrap($3, true))
- /** The drag_begin signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag is started.
- * A typical reason to connect to this signal is to set up a custom drag icon with
- * drag_source_set_icon().
- *
- * @param context the drag context
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void drag_begin(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context), "drag_begin")
-
- /** The drag_end signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag is finished.
- * A typical reason to connect to this signal is to undo things done in the drag-begin
- * signal handler.
- *
- * @param context the drag context.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void drag_end(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context), "drag_end")
-
- /** The drag_data_get signal is emitted on the drag source when the drop site requests
- * the data which is dragged. It is the responsibility of the signal handler to fill @a data
- * with the data in the format which is indicated by @a info. See SelectionData::set() and
- * SelectionData::set_text().
- *
- * @param context: the drag context.
- * @param selection_data the SelectionData to be filled with the dragged data.
- * @param info the info that has been registered with the target in the TargetList.
- * @param time the timestamp at which the data was requested.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void drag_data_get(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, SelectionData& selection_data, guint info, guint time), "drag_data_get", custom_c_callback)
-
- /** The drag_data_delete signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag with the action
- * Gdk::ACTION_MOVE is successfully completed. The signal handler is responsible for deleting
- * the data that has been dropped. What "delete" means, depends on the context of the drag
- * operation.
- *
- * @param context the drag context.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void drag_data_delete(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context), "drag_data_delete")
-
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool drag_failed(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, DragResult result), "drag_failed", no_default_handler)
-
- /** The drag_leave signal is emitted on the drop site when the cursor leaves the widget.
- * A typical reason to connect to this signal is to undo things done in the drag_motion signal handler,
- * e.g. undo highlighting with drag_unhighlight().
- *
- * @param context the drag context.
- * @param time the timestamp of the motion event.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void drag_leave(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, guint time), "drag_leave")
-
- /** The drag_motion signal is emitted on the drop site when the user moves the cursor over
- * the widget during a drag. The signal handler must determine whether the cursor position is in
- * a drop zone or not. If it is not in a drop zone, it returns false and no further processing is
- * necessary. Otherwise, the handler returns true. In this case, the handler is responsible for
- * providing the necessary information for displaying feedback to the user, by calling
- * drag_status(). If the decision whether the drop will be accepted or rejected can't be made
- * based solely on the cursor position and the type of the data, the handler may inspect the dragged
- * data by calling drag_get_data() and defer the drag_status() call to the drag_data_received
- * handler.
- *
- * Note that there is no drag_enter signal. The drag receiver has to keep track of whether
- * he has received any drag_motion signals since the last drag_leave and if not, treat the
- * drag_motion signal as an "enter" signal. Upon an "enter", the handler will typically highlight
- * the drop site with drag_highlight().
- *
- * @param context the drag context.
- * @param x the x coordinate of the current cursor position.
- * @param y the y coordinate of the current cursor position.
- * @param time the timestamp of the motion event.
- * @result whether the cursor position is in a drop zone.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool drag_motion(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int x, int y, guint time), "drag_motion")
-
- /** The drag_drop signal is emitted on the drop site when the user drops the data
- * onto the widget. The signal handler must determine whether the cursor position is in
- * a drop zone or not. If it is not in a drop zone, it returns false and no further
- * processing is necessary. Otherwise, the handler returns true. In this case, the handler
- * must ensure that gtk_drag_finish() is called to let the source know that the drop is done.
- * The call to gtk_drag_finish() can be done either directly or in a drag_data_received handler
- * which gets triggered by calling drop_get_data() to receive the data for one or more of the
- * supported targets.
- *
- * @param context the drag context.
- * @param x the x coordinate of the current cursor position.
- * @param y the y coordinate of the current cursor position.
- * @param time: the timestamp of the motion event.
- * @result whether the cursor position is in a drop zone
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(bool drag_drop(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int x, int y, guint time), "drag_drop")
-
- /** The drag_data_received signal is emitted on the drop site when the dragged data has been
- * received. If the data was received in order to determine whether the drop will be accepted,
- * the handler is expected to call drag_status() and <emphasis>not</emphasis> finish the drag.
- * If the data was received in response to a drag_drop signal (and this is the last target to be
- * received), the handler for this signal is expected to process the received data and then call
- * drag_finish(), setting the @a success parameter depending on whether the data was processed
- * successfully.
- *
- * The handler may inspect and modify @drag_context->action before calling gtk_drag_finish(),
- * e.g. to implement %Gdk::ACTION_ASK.
- *
- * @param drag_context the drag context
- * @param x where the drop happened
- * @param y where the drop happened
- * @param data the received data
- * @param info the info that has been registered with the target in the TargetList.
- * @param time the timestamp at which the data was received.
- */
_WRAP_SIGNAL(void drag_data_received(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::DragContext>& context, int x, int y, const SelectionData& selection_data, guint info, guint time), "drag_data_received")
//_WRAP_SIGNAL(Glib::RefPtr<Atk::Object> get_accessible(), "get_accessible", ifdef GTKMM_ATKMM_ENABLED, refreturn, deprecated)
[
Date Prev][
Date Next] [
Thread Prev][
Thread Next]
[
Thread Index]
[
Date Index]
[
Author Index]
